Olympic Delivery Authority: Manpower

Don Foster: To ask the Minister for the Olympics how many people were employed by the Olympic Delivery Authority (ODA) at the most recent date for which figures are available; what the staffing costs of the ODA will be in 2008-09; and how many of the ODA's staff work on  (a) project management,  (b) legacy planning and  (c) financial oversight.

Tessa Jowell: As of 30 June 2008, the ODA employed 212 members of staff. This consists of permanent staff, fixed term contract staff, and secondments. The overall management costs budget for 2008-09 is based on an ODA headcount of 276. The agreed total budget for ODA management costs for 2008-09 is £24,223,000. This budget has been set to cover salary costs, including, employer national insurance contributions, employer pension contributions and bonus payments that are payable to eligible staff based on performance and achievement of overall objectives.
	The ODA currently has 128 members of staff working in project management roles across a number of ODA teams.
	The ODA is leading the first phase of legacy which is focused on cleaning, clearing, and creating the park and the development of new infrastructure, utilities, and venues. The second phase is led by the LDA and is focused on what the park is used for after the games. It is not possible to provide a breakdown of those ODA staff that are exclusively working on legacy planning roles as every project within the programme is considered with legacy in mind, ensuring that legacy requirements are incorporated into design briefs, specifications and business plans.
	The ODA currently has 15 employees working in the Finance and Business Planning Team who work closely with the delivery partner on the financial oversight of the programme. In addition the ODA has engaged Ernst and Young to provide an internal audit service.

Olympic Games 2012

Ben Chapman: To ask the Minister for the Olympics what steps she plans to take to ensure that the 2012 Olympics have an effective economic and social legacy in all parts of the UK.

Tessa Jowell: In June this year we published the Legacy Action Plan (LAP) which sets out the long term benefits we hope to stimulate through hosting the Olympic games and Paralympic games in 2012, and how we plan to achieve them. This is unprecedented as no other host city has ever been at this stage of planning, nor so committed to a broad and sustainable legacy this early in preparations.
	The LAP sets out the Government's priorities for UK-wide legacy as defined by our five legacy promises, published in Our Promise for 2012 in June 2007. This includes a target to help get two million people more active through sport and physical activity by 2012. Sport England will seek to get one million more active through sport; they will do this through new engagement with national governing bodies and through county sport partnerships.
	Further to the announcement in June, Government have now set out further details of the £140 million cross-Government free swimming scheme. The scheme is designed to encourage as many local authorities as possible to participate in making swimming free for over 60s and under 16s in their local communities, but also to stimulate ambitious authorities to maximise and sustain uptake through other initiatives such as free lessons for adults who cannot swim, the introduction of swimming coordinators and to provide incentives for the most ambitious to move further towards a universal free swimming offer.
	The LAP also includes initiatives to stimulate economic and social benefit by increasing tourism and improving access to skills and business opportunities. This includes, for example, the London 2012 Business Network giving business across the UK access to the 75,000 contracts in the London 2012 supply chains worth £6 billion.
	Facilities in the London 2012 Pre-Games Training Camp Guide which will be published in Beijing will also have the opportunity to attract inward investment and showcase their local area on an international stage. UKTI are also developing programmes to use the games as a springboard for export.
	In addition to the LAP, each of the English regions and nations has its own plan for legacy initiatives at a local level that complement this work.
	As Members of Parliament we should do everything we can in our constituencies to ensure the opportunities and long term benefits generated by the games are realised at local level across the UK.

Employment

James Clappison: To ask the Prime Minister pursuant to the Answer of 16 July 2008,  Official Report, column 247 to the right hon. Member for Rushcliffe, how many of the three million people to whom he referred are  (a) UK citizens and  (b) non-UK citizens.

Gordon Brown: I refer the hon. Member to the information produced by the Office of National Statistics which shows that 2.9 million more people are in work since 1997:
	http://www.statistics.gov.uk/downloads/theme_labour/LMS_FR_HS/WebTable01.xls

Cromwell Green

Geoffrey Clifton-Brown: To ask the hon. Member for North Devon, representing the House of Commons Commission pursuant to the answer to the hon. Member for Cotswold of 23 April 2008,  Official Report, column 2046W, on the Cromwell Green entrance, whether the Commission has now considered the review of lessons learned from the visitor reception building project; and if he will make a statement on its main findings.

Nick Harvey: The independent Post-Project Review of the Cromwell Green Visitor Reception Building, undertaken by Roy Davis Associates LLP, has now been received by the Clerk of the House. It was reported to the Commission at its recent meeting, and will be reported to the House of Lords House Committee in October.
	The review presents a thorough analysis of the project. The Cromwell Green entrance opened on 21 April 2008 and has been operating successfully since as an important enhancement of visitor reception at Westminster. But its construction was subject to exceptional delay and significant cost overruns. The main findings of the Review are:
	until autumn 2007 the governance of the project was poor, and it is questionable whether the Houses were advised in sufficient detail to make balanced decisions;
	the initial project delivery date of September 2006 drove the project but was not achievable;
	once on site, delays occurred due to the complexity and uniqueness of the design, the fact that it was incomplete and uncoordinated, which required it to be extensively reworked during construction, and the lack of resolution of critical issues;
	the requirements of major parts of the project brief were ignored;
	the management of the design and the construction was undermined by the split responsibilities of project managers and the lack of ownership of the project; and
	both the cost management and advice and the procurement and production of contracts for consultants and the contractor were poor.
	The repeatedly escalating costs and continued slippages in this project have raised serious questions about project management competences in the House service. A number of key steps have already been taken. As part of a reorganisation following the review by Sir Kevin Tebbit it was decided to create a reunified Parliamentary Estates Directorate and recruit senior managers with appropriate skills. The Directorate is now under the direct responsibility of a Director General of Facilities. As part of their recruitment, both new postholders have been required to demonstrate competence, and personal track records of delivery, in the areas of estates and works matters.
	Further improvements relating to transparency and control of projects are under way, and these will take account of recommendations for future practice from the Post-Project Review. The Commission will receive a progress report from the Clerk of the House in the autumn on the establishment of the revised management arrangements and the effectiveness of the new controls over projects. It supports the Clerk of the House in his determination to ensure that full lessons are learned from this major failure in project management.
	A copy of the Post-Project Review has been placed in the Library and on the parliamentary website.

Departmental Delivery Services

Mark Hoban: To ask the Solicitor-General what steps the Attorney-General's office has taken to monitor the cost of its mail services in the last 12 months.

Vera Baird: The Attorney-General's Office are in the process of reviewing our post room services, this includes usage of Royal Mail services, DX membership, Government Car Despatch Agency's Government mail service (formerly IDS) and our messengers' hand delivery services in order to achieve greater efficiency and savings.

Departmental Sick Leave

David Simpson: To ask the Solicitor-General how many and what percentage of staff in the Attorney-General's Office have had more than two periods of sickness absence of less than five days in each of the last three years.

Vera Baird: The number and percentage of staff that have had more than two periods of sickness of less than five days is illustrated in the following table:
	
		
			   Number of staff  Percentage of staff 
			 2007-08 3 15.3 
			 2006-07 3 14.7 
			 2005-06 3 13.7

Departmental Sick Leave

David Simpson: To ask the Solicitor-General how many staff in her Department have had five or more periods of sickness absence of less than five days in two or more of the last five years.

Vera Baird: There have been less than five staff that fall into this category, therefore this information cannot be provided on grounds of confidentiality.

Labour Party: Finance

Andrew Tyrie: To ask the hon. Member for Gosport, representing the Speaker's Committee on the Electoral Commission whether the Electoral Commission plans to publish, or otherwise make available for independent scrutiny, the accounts submitted by the Labour party for 2007.

Peter Viggers: The Electoral Commission informs me that as required by section 46 of the Political Parties Elections and Referendum Act 2000, the Electoral Commission makes all statements of accounts available for public inspection. Statements of accounts for 2007 submitted by parties with income or expenditure over £250,000, including the Labour party, are due to be published on the Commission's website on 30 July 2008.

Political Parties: Finance

Andrew Tyrie: To ask the hon. Member for Gosport, representing the Speaker's Committee on the Electoral Commission what procedures are followed by the Electoral Commission in circumstances where a party is unable to submit signed off accounts demonstrating its financial validity as a going concern; and if he will make a statement.

Peter Viggers: The Political Parties, Elections and Referendums Act 2000 requires registered parties to submit an annual statement of accounts to the Electoral Commission. Where the gross income or total expenditure of the registered party during the period of those accounts exceeds £250,000, that statement of accounts must be submitted within six months of the party's financial year end, and must be audited by a qualified auditor. The legislation provides for civil penalties where these requirements are not met and a failure to comply may also give rise to a criminal offence.
	The Electoral Commission informs me that it reviews all statements of accounts, publishes them on its website and pursues the penalties provided for in cases where the requirements have been breached. The Electoral Commission further informs me that it publishes guidance for parties on preparing their statements of accounts. This guidance is available on the Commission's website at
	http://www.electoralcommission.org.uk/_data/assets/electoral_commission_pdf_file/0014/13460/Draftguidance_21211-8865_E_N_S_W_.pdf

Political Parties: Finance

Andrew Tyrie: To ask the hon. Member for Gosport, representing the Speaker's Committee on the Electoral Commission whether the Electoral Commission has produced guidance on the declaration of donations and sponsorship by trades unions by declared electoral candidates outside of election periods.

Peter Viggers: The Electoral Commission informs me that it has published 'Donations and loans: guidance for regulated donees in Great Britain'. Regulated donees include members of registered political parties who receive donations for their use and benefit in connection with their political activities, such as campaigning outside the relevant regulated period. This guidance covers the reporting of all donations from all permissible donors, including trade unions.

Political Parties: Finance

Andrew Tyrie: To ask the hon. Member for Gosport, representing the Speaker's Committee on the Electoral Commission pursuant to the answer of 7 July 2008,  Official Report, columns 1309-10W, on political parties: finance, on what dates the Electoral Commission met the Secretary of State for Justice to discuss the White Paper on party finance and expenditure ahead of its publication.

Peter Viggers: The Electoral Commission informs me that the chairman of the Commission, Sam Younger, and Commission officials met with the Secretary of State for Justice on 12 November 2007 and 14 April 2008. A range of matters were discussed regarding party and election finance, some of which are addressed by the Government's White Paper, Party finance and expenditure in the United Kingdom.

Afghanistan: Reconstruction

Tobias Ellwood: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development how many members of the Government's new reconstruction unit are based in Helmand province.

Douglas Alexander: Stabilisation Unit staff are currently located in Helmand. For security reasons, Stabilisation Unit does not publish exact details on the number and location of its staff in Afghanistan.

Africa: Children

Linda Riordan: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what steps his Department is taking to increase the protection of vulnerable children in Africa.

Gillian Merron: The UK Government remain firmly committed to tackling child vulnerability in Africa, including those affected by HIV/AIDS. Over the last three years the Department for International Development (DFID) has provided over £120 million for support of orphans and vulnerable children (OVC) in Africa. This includes supporting National Plans of Action for OVC and expanding support for the needs of the most vulnerable children in health, education, social protection and HIV prevention and treatment programmes.
	Over the next three years, the UK Government will expand their social protection programmes and increase spending to over £200 million. DFID will work in at least eight African countries to develop social protection policies and programmes, with governments and NGOs that provide effective predictable support for the most vulnerable households—ensuring access to social services and protection from abuse. DFID will also work with others to provide better diagnostics and treatment of children infected with HIV and living with AIDS. A copy of the updated strategy 'Achieving Universal Access—the UK's strategy for halting and reversing the spread of HIV in the developing world' and supporting evidence paper have been placed in the Libraries of both Houses. These are also available on the DFID website:
	www.dfid.gov.uk
	DFID's broader health sector initiatives all benefit vulnerable children, particularly in Africa. These include support (£30 million for 2006-8) to the Global Alliance for Vaccines and Immunisation (GAVI), a long term (20 year) £1.38 billion commitment to the International Finance Facility for Immunisation (IFFIm), $485 million in support of drug development incentives by the pilot Advanced Market Commitment (AMC) for pneumococcal vaccines and support of the Global Fund to fight AIDS, TB and Malaria (GFATM) where DFID has made an unprecedented long-term commitment, subject to performance, of up to £1 billion between 2008-15.

Departmental Home Working

Bob Spink: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what proportion of his Department's work force worked from home in whole or in part in the most recent period for which figures are available.

Gillian Merron: DFID does not keep central records of the number of home workers, or the proportion of working time that is carried out from home. Arrangements for home working are agreed informally between line managers and individuals. 1,798 of our 2,467 employees (73 per cent.) have been issued with laptop computers rather than a desk-top computer. This allows them to work from home or a regular or ad hoc basis.

Departmental Manpower

John Redwood: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what the change in the number of employees in his Department has been since July 2006.

Gillian Merron: The Department for International Development (DFID) submits quarterly returns on our Home Civil Service (HCS) staffing numbers, to the Office for National Statistics.
	DFID also employs staff appointed in country (SAIC) recruited locally to work in our network of over 50 offices overseas on local terms and conditions of service.
	Details of our HCS and SAIC staff numbers, showing the separate and overall comparisons between the end of June 2006 and end of June 2008, are shown in the following table:
	
		
			   Headcount at end of June 2006  Full-Time equivalent( 1)  posts at end of June 2006  Headcount at end of June 2008  Full-time equivalent( 1 ) posts at end of June 2008  Net change in headcount  Percentage change in headcount  Net change in numbers of full-time equivalent( 1)  posts  Percentage change in numbers of full-time equivalent( 1)  posts 
			 Home Civil (HCS) staff numbers 1,817 1,768 1,653 1,606 -164 -9 -162 -9.2 
			 Staff Appointed in country (SAIC) numbers 899 893 799 795 -100 -11.1 -98 -11 
			 Overall total 2,716 2,661 2,452 2,401 -264 -9.7 -260 -9.8 
			 (1) DFID reports HCS staffing numbers to Office for National Statistics using Full-Time equivalent (FTE) figures. Full-Time Equivalent takes account of the specific work patterns of each individual e.g. an individual who works 0.5 of a full-time schedule is only counted as 0.5 for the purposes of FTE. For comparison purposes, headcount is where each individual is counted as 1 regardless of their actual hours worked.

Departmental Training

Mark Hoban: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what training courses were  (a) available to and  (b) taken up by civil servants in his Department in the last 12 months.

Shahid Malik: Reporting which training courses were  (a) available to and  (b) taken by civil servants in the Department of International Department in the last 12 months would incur disproportionate cost, since the majority of training activity is arranged by sub-departments and overseas offices.
	Courses which have been provided centrally include Leadership and Management Development, Negotiating and Influencing, Working with Ministers, Induction and Health and Safety.

Kosovo: Overseas Aid

Michael Moore: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what the outcomes were of the donors' conference for Kosovo held on 11 July; and what his Department's policy objectives are for its engagement with the Republic of Kosovo.

Douglas Alexander: The conclusions from the 11 July Kosovo Donors' Conference are available on the following website at:
	http://www.seerecon.org/kdc/conclusions.pdf
	The UK's objective in Kosovo is to support the development of a prosperous, stable, democratic and multi-ethnic state. Within this objective, DFID's priorities in Kosovo are to promote improved economic growth and employment, reduce the risk of conflict, and support the development of accountable government institutions.

Kosovo: Overseas Aid

Michael Moore: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development in what areas the Government of the Republic of Kosovo has requested assistance from his Department in the last 12 months.

Douglas Alexander: The Government of Kosovo have outlined their policy priorities for the next three years and their requirements for donor assistance in their Medium-term Expenditure Framework (MTEF). This document was presented at the 11 July Kosovo Donors' Conference. The UK has pledged £23 million to support Kosovo over the next three years. We will align our support with the priorities in Kosovo's MTEF and are actively encouraging all other donors to do likewise.

Land Mines

Mark Harper: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development 
	(1)  what mine harvesting projects his Department is funding in  (a) Afghanistan,  (b) Cambodia and  (c) Yemen;
	(2)  what mine harvesting projects his Department is funding in Afghanistan.

Gillian Merron: Since 2001, the Department for International Development (DFID) has spent over £10 million per year to clear and reduce the impact of land mines, cluster munitions and other unexploded remnants of war in developing countries around the world.
	 (a) In Afghanistan, DFID is providing £10.6 million over the next five years to the charity HALO Trust to clear land mines and other unexploded ordnance in Herat Province, in order to return land back to productive use for the poor and vulnerable.
	 (b) In Cambodia, DFID funds demining work through the charities HALO Trust and Mines Advisory Group (MAG). HALO Trust's programme will amount to around £3 million over the three years 2007-10, and the MAG programme will be around £1.5 million for the same period. Both organisations work to reduce the impact of mines on the most vulnerable and effected communities, with HALO focusing on large-scale humanitarian clearance and MAG linking closely to other development programmes.
	 (c) DFID does not currently fund any demining projects in Yemen.

Somalia: Food Aid

Tom Clarke: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what steps he is taking to provide food aid to Somalia; and if he will make a statement.

Gillian Merron: The humanitarian situation in many parts of Somalia has significantly deteriorated not only due to ongoing fighting but drought, uncontrolled hyperinflation and a broad economic crisis. The Food Security Analysis Unit (FSAU) estimates that 2.6 million Somali'' (approximately 35 per cent. of the population) will require relief assistance in 2008.
	Since January 2008 the Department for International Development (DFID) has provided £17.9 million for humanitarian assistance to the worst affected areas. This includes £12 million to the World Food Programme (WFP) who are distributing more than 15,000 metric tonnes of food aid a month, and a further £1.4 million to UNICEF and World Vision for emergency nutrition projects in South Central Somalia.
	DFID continues to advocate for the safe passage of all humanitarian goods and aid workers in Somalia.

Swaziland: Elections

John Mann: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what steps his Department is taking to support multi-party democracy in Swaziland in preparation for elections in October.

Meg Munn: I have been asked to reply.
	Our non-resident high commissioner and deputy high commissioner to Swaziland have raised the issue of multi-party elections in that country frequently, over the last year, with a range of figures including the King, politicians, civil servants, civil society groups and others. The Government will be giving £230,000 this year to fund the Electoral Institute of Southern Africa to train a Pan African parliamentary observer mission to all the Southern African Development Community countries holding elections in 2008-09, which includes the election in Swaziland.

Swaziland: HIV Infection

John Mann: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what recent assessment his Department has made of HIV prevalence in Swaziland.

Gillian Merron: The Department for International Development's (DFID) assessment of HIV prevalence in Swaziland is based on data from UNAIDS, whose mandate is to monitor HIV prevalence. UNAIDS's latest statistics show that HIV prevalence rates in Swaziland are among the highest in the world, but are improving. The current estimate of infection rates for those aged between 15 to 49 years is 26 per cent., compared to 33 per cent. in 2005. Further information is available on the UNAIDS website:
	www.unaids.org

Swaziland: Trade Unions

John Mann: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what discussions he has had with the government of Swaziland on restrictions on trades unions in that country.

Meg Munn: I have been asked to reply.
	Our non-resident Mission to Swaziland, based in Pretoria, has a regular programme of quarterly visits to the Kingdom. Our non-resident deputy high commissioner, at her last visit in May, met with a wide range of government, opposition, non-governmental and other civil society figures. Her discussions focused on our support for multi-party elections and the implementation of a constitution which, if implemented, would enhance workers' rights and benefit trade unions.

Abandoned Vehicles

Bob Neill: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what assessment he has made of the effect of the implementation of the EU End of Life Vehicles Directive on trends in the levels of abandonment of vehicles manufactured before July 2002.

Malcolm Wicks: I have been asked to reply.
	The number of vehicles of all ages being abandoned is one of several indicators monitored by the Department since implementing the end-of-life vehicles directive. We believe that a combination of factors has contributed to the significant reduction in the numbers of abandoned vehicles recorded in recent years. Those factors include the introduction of the End-of-Life Vehicles Regulations 2003 and the End-of-Life Vehicles (Producer Responsibility) Regulations 2005, improvements in the accuracy of the vehicle register, various Government and local campaigns to tackle abandonment, and the continuing high value of scrap metal. It is difficult to isolate the individual impact of any one of these factors.

Agriculture: Land

Bob Neill: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what the average cost of a hectare or equivalent measure of farmland according to the Farm Business Survey was in each year for which figures are available.

Jonathan R Shaw: While the Farm Business survey does collect a level of information on farm balance sheets, the better measure of the value of farmland over time is provided by the aggregate balance sheet published in "Agriculture in the United Kingdom".
	The aggregate balance sheet shows the value of fixed assets at a point in time (December each year) and the value of liabilities at a point in time. Fixed assets are dominated by land. As the volume of land is virtually unchanging, the trend in the value of land and buildings is dominated by the effect of land prices. Estimates of the value of land and buildings from the latest balance sheet are given in the table below and show the value of UK agricultural land and buildings has increased by 40 per cent. at current prices, between 2003 and 2006.
	
		
			  Value of UK agricultural land and buildings 
			  As at December each year  £ billion 
			 1993 50.7 
			 1994 56.3 
			 1995 67.9 
			 1996 77.4 
			 1997 84.0 
			 1998 87.1 
			 1999 93.1 
			 2000 94.7 
			 2001 97.7 
			 2002 96.9 
			 2003 102.2 
			 2004 111.5 
			 2005 121.6 
			 2006(1) 142.7 
			 (1) Provisional  Source: Agriculture in the UK

Air Pollution

Edward Davey: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what changes have been made to his Department's air quality monitoring programme in the last two years; and if he will make a statement.

Jonathan R Shaw: DEFRA and the devolved administrations reviewed air quality monitoring needs in the light of the 2007 Air Quality Strategy and new EU Air Quality Directive requirements and improvements in the concentrations of some pollutants.
	As a result some new sites/monitors have been brought into the network or installed, while others have been removed from the network or closed. The changes to the Automatic Urban and Rural and Hydrocarbons networks fall into three broad areas:
	A reduction in the number of carbon monoxide (from 79 to 26) and sulphur dioxide (from 76 to 48) monitors, commensurate with the generally low levels of both pollutants currently found. However, there will be increased sulphur dioxide monitoring in some areas around particular industrial hotspots.
	Movement of oxides of nitrogen monitors from agglomerations to zones, and from urban background to roadside, in line with the requirements of the new air quality Directive.
	The creation of a ultrafine particulate matter (PM2.5) network, and changes to the fine particulate matter (PM10) network, in line with the requirements of the new air quality Directive.

Bromine

David Taylor: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what resources his Department is making available to research the effectiveness and safety of new environmentally-friendly alternative flame retardants which do not include the use of Deca-BDE.

Phil Woolas: In 2003 the Environment Agency commissioned a report on the Prioritisation of Flame Retardants for Environmental Risk Assessment. The aim of the study was to assess the use of and risks associated with flame retardants, in particular to identify substances that might require detailed consideration in terms of their possible impact on the environment. It also considered issues concerning substitution of flame retardants. The study noted that little was known about the effects of many of the substances, including those sometimes proposed for use as environmentally-friendly substitutes.
	The new European Regulation on the Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals (known as REACH) places on industry the responsibility to assess and understand the potential human health and environmental impacts of the substances they produce in accordance with the principle of "No Data, No Market". REACH also has the aim of replacing substances of very high concern, as defined by criteria in the regulation, with suitable alternatives. Industry will have to justify their continued use. These provisions will drive substitution of harmful substances and also provide the assurance that the substitutes are less harmful than the substances they replace. On current evidence decabromodiphenyl ether (decaBDE) does not meet the criteria of a substance of very high concern.

Carbon Emissions: Farms

David Drew: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what statutory means are at his disposal to press farmers to reduce their greenhouse gas emissions.

Phil Woolas: There are currently no regulations or statutory instruments which place a direct requirement on farmers to reduce greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions. However, a number of measures have an indirect impact on agriculture GHG emissions, such as measures under the nitrates directive and conditions under cross compliance. There are also a number of voluntary initiatives which can help to reduce GHGs from farming, including the Environmental Stewardship schemes and various grant schemes.
	DEFRA has a programme of research dedicated to agriculture and climate change issues which includes research into reducing emissions from livestock, manure and fertiliser application, as well as measures to protect carbon stores in soils. We are working closely with relevant stakeholders, including through the Rural Climate Change Forum and the Farming Futures communications project, to help ensure that farmers have the information and advice they need to take practical action to reduce GHG emissions. As such, we are promoting anaerobic digestion to reduce methane emissions from manure, slurry and other organic material.

Coastal Areas: Rights of Way

Andrew George: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what plans his Department has to improve access to coastal areas in the UK.

Jonathan R Shaw: A proposal for Natural England to identify a coastal route and associated coastal margin around the English coast, to which there will be a right of access on foot, is contained in the draft Marine Bill. In Wales, the Welsh Assembly Government is considering appropriate statutory provisions for Wales which might be included in the final Bill. In Scotland, the Land Reform (Scotland) Act 2003 provides a statutory right of access to most land and inland water and access in Northern Ireland is covered by the Access to Countryside (NI) Order 1983.

Cumbria

Eric Martlew: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what plans he has to increase the number of people working in his Department in Cumbria.

Jonathan R Shaw: The majority of DEFRA staff working in Cumbria are located in Carlisle, Penrith and Workington.
	Animal Health has an office at Carlisle that is staffed at a level to carry out duties effectively. Currently there are no immediate plans to increase staff levels.
	Present staffing levels within Rural Payments Agency are sufficient to meet present business needs and are expected to remain reasonably constant going forward, although processes and structures are constantly under review for efficiency purposes.
	There are currently no plans to increase staff numbers at the Veterinary Laboratory Agency's office in Penrith.

Departmental Disciplinary Proceedings

John Redwood: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs how many staff in his Department and its agencies have been  (a) dismissed and  (b) disciplined for their conduct in the last two years.

Jonathan R Shaw: The number of staff dismissed and disciplined for their conduct by the Department for the Environment, Food and Rural Affairs and its agencies during the last two financial years, 2006-07 and 2007-08 are as follows:
	 Dismissed: 36
	This figure represents:
	Nine staff dismissed from DEFRA
	27 Staff dismissed from DEFRA agencies
	 Disciplined: 72
	This figure represents:
	Six staff disciplined within DEFRA
	66 Staff disciplined within DEFRA agencies
	The figure refers to staff disciplined for recorded minor, serious and gross misconduct. However, it does not reflect the total number of staff disciplined for minor misconduct. Because these warnings are issued by line managers who are not required to record these cases centrally. To obtain this information would be of disproportionate cost.
	The Civil Service Management Code sets out the requirements for departments to have procedures in place to deal with conduct and disciplinary issues. The DEFRA procedures are laid down in the staff handbook which is accessed on the departmental intranet.

Departmental Research

Bob Spink: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what proportion of his Department's budget and that of its predecessor was used for research within its areas of responsibility in each of the last 10 years.

Jonathan R Shaw: The proportion of DEFRA's budget that was used for research and development in each of the last eight years was:
	
		
			  Financial year  Proportion of Budget used for research and Development (Percentage) 
			 2001-02 7.33 
			 2002-03 7.40 
			 2003-04 6.64 
			 2004-05 6.20 
			 2005-06 6.64 
			 2006-07 6.06 
			 2007-08 5.02 
		
	
	The table shows the research and development proportion of total expenditure for the financial years since the department was formed in 2001. There are no figures provided for DEFRA's predecessor departments as this information could only be provided by incurring disproportionate cost.
	The acquisition and use of evidence is central to the development and delivery of robust policies and operations and underpins DEFRA's reputation and ability to influence.
	In 2007-08, around 95 per cent. of DEFRA's research and development budget was spent by policy groups to directly support their strategic priorities. The remaining funds were used by the central evidence teams to fund cross-cutting and horizon scanning work. In addition to spend on research and development, approximately £200 million was spent in 2007-08 on other science, including surveillance, monitoring, field trials and knowledge transfer.

Dolphins and Porpoises

Bill Wiggin: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs 
	(1)  what data sources he uses to establish  (a) the population of (i) bottlenose and (ii) common dolphins in UK waters,  (b) the existence of sub-populations and  (c) dolphin population trends; and if he will publish such data;
	(2)  what data sources he uses to establish  (a) the population of harbour porpoises in UK waters, (b) the existence of sub-populations and  (c) porpoise population trends; and if he will publish this data.

Jonathan R Shaw: Cetacean abundance has been assessed recently in European waters through two large international survey projects: Small Cetacean Abundance in the North sea in 2005 (SCANS-II) and Offshore Distribution and Abundance—2007 (CODA). The first project assessed abundance of both species on the continental shelf of the European Atlantic and North sea and the latter in the offshore environment.
	The estimates from SCANS-II were compared with those from an earlier survey (SCANS) in 1994 and there was no significant difference found between population size for harbour porpoise. The final report has recently been submitted to the EU and will shortly be published.
	The CODA project focuses on cetaceans in offshore waters of the European Atlantic and began in November 2006. Shipboard surveys to assess abundance were carried out in July 2007 and the data are currently being processed. Publication of the results will follow the project's completion in September 2008.
	Common dolphins are widely distributed, with the number of animals in the continental shelf area varying substantially from year to year. There is no known sub structuring of the common dolphin population in UK waters.
	For bottlenose dolphins there is some substructuring. Genetic studies have indicated that the  Tursiops. truncatus occurring in the offshore waters of the North Atlantic belong to a large oceanic population. Conversely, and although coastal populations around the UK are not genetically isolated, there is some evidence for geographic structuring.
	In 2007, Favourable Conservation Status assessments were undertaken for both species under the requirements of the Habitats Directive. The bottlenose dolphin was reported to be in a favourable condition, while the status of the common dolphin was unknown, due mainly to our lacking of knowledge in the offshore abundance. CODA was in part initiated to provide this information. The UK FCS assessments are available from the Joint Nature Conservation Committee's website.
	The two SCANS surveys (1994 and 2005) estimated common dolphin abundance in the Celtic sea area. However, the 1994 estimate was not corrected for animals missed on the transect line or for responsive movement, and this is now known to generate significant positive bias. Therefore, it is unknown whether the differences in the abundances obtained were indicative of an actual change in abundance or were related to the different methodology used. Additionally, these two surveys only covered the continental shelf area. This species is known to move widely between inshore and offshore areas.
	The subpopulation structure of North East Atlantic harbour porpoises has still not been elucidated fully. However, two subpopulations are recognised in UK waters. The first in the North sea and through to western Scotland; and the second in the Celtic and Irish sea area.
	The abundance estimates from SCANS-II were compared with those from an earlier survey (SCANS) in 1994 for the North sea. There was no significant difference found between population size for harbour porpoise over this decadal period. The final report for SCANS II has recently been submitted to the EU, following which the work will be published.

Domestic Waste

David Simpson: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what estimate he has made of the amount of domestic waste produced in England and Wales in each of the last three years, broken down by region; and how much was produced per household in each region in each year.

Joan Ruddock: The household waste figures are calculated from data submitted to WasteDataFlow by local authorities and are for the last three financial years for which data are published.
	
		
			  Total household waste (million tonnes) 
			  Region  2004-05  2005-06  2006-07 
			 North East 1.33 1.29 1.30 
			 North West 3.77 3.82 3.72 
			 Yorkshire and the Humber 2.55 2.51 2.57 
			 East Midlands 2.27 2.19 2.25 
			 West Midlands 2.68 2.66 2.72 
			 East 2.87 2.85 2.90 
			 London 3.30 3.33 3.39 
			 South East 4.27 4.19 4.26 
			 South West 2.62 2.63 2.67 
			 
			 England 25.66 25.45 25.78 
		
	
	The household waste per household figures are calculated using the same WasteDataFlow data and the Valuation Office Agency dwelling stock figures.
	
		
			  Household waste (kilograms per household per year) 
			  Region  2004-05  2005-06  2006-07 
			 North East 1,165 1,117 1,121 
			 North West 1,244 1,246 1,206 
			 Yorkshire and the Humber 1,153 1,119 1,136 
			 East Midlands 1,230 1,163 1,179 
			 West Midlands 1,181 1,155 1,174 
			 East 1,210 1,177 1,187 
			 London 1,040 1,032 1,043 
			 South East 1,230 1,188 1,195 
			 South West 1,174 1,154 1,159 
			 
			 England 1,180 1,152 1,156 
		
	
	Any issues relating to Wales are a devolved matter for the Welsh Assembly government and should be answered by them.

Domestic Wastes: Fees and Charges

Eric Pickles: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what powers waste collection authorities have to fine householders for putting rubbish or recycling into the wrong rubbish or recycling bin or box; and what the statutory basis is for such powers.

Joan Ruddock: Section 46 of the Environmental Protection Act 1990 (EPA) allows a waste collection authority, by issuing a section 46 notice (s.46 notice), to specify the conditions of the waste collection service it provides. The conditions a s.46 notice covers includes the number and type of receptacles to be used, how the waste is to be presented, where and when the receptacle(s) should be placed for collection and any other conditions to facilitate its collection.
	Section 46(6) of the EPA makes it an offence for a recipient of the service to breach the conditions set in the s.46 notice and those that breach could be prosecuted under this section. In such a case, the magistrates court would determine the fine.
	Section 48 of the Clean Neighbourhoods and Environment Act 2005 (CNEA) amended the EPA, adding section 47ZA. Section 47ZA allows a waste collection authority to issue fixed penalty notices for breaches of s.46 of the EPA. The amount of the fixed penalty is set by the waste collection authority in relation to the authority's area, or if no amount is set £100. An authority can accept a lesser amount if it is paid before a date specified by the authority.

Environment Protection: Planning Permission

Mark Harper: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs 
	(1)  how many requests from planning authorities for responses on planning permission applications the Environment Agency has received in  (a) 2007-08 and  (b) 2008-09 to date;
	(2)  how many Environment Agency staff are working to process requests from planning authorities for responses on planning permission applications;
	(3)  what the current backlog is for requests from planning authorities for responses on planning permission applications to the Environment Agency; and what the current average waiting time for responses is.

Phil Woolas: The Environment Agency receives requests from planning authorities for comments on planning application consultations, development plans and pre-application consultation requests from developers. The Environment Agency replied to 49,432 planning application consultations in 2007-08. In the first quarter of 2008-09 the Environment Agency replied to 11,279 planning applications.
	Planning application consultations sent to the Environment Agency are initially dealt with by Planning Liaison teams, but they may also require additional input from Environment Agency technical experts in issues such as flood risk, pollution, water, waste and wetland biodiversity. There are currently 238 Area Planning posts in the Environment Agency.
	There is no current 'backlog' of requests. The current live workload is 3,072 items of 'casework', which includes planning applications, inquiries and other consultations. The average response time for planning applications in the first quarter of 2008-09 was 15.8 days.
	In the Environment Agency's most recent report (2006-07, December 2007) on replies to planning application responses within the statutory 21 day time limit (or other period as agreed in writing with the applicant), 89 per cent. of consultations (on 40,168 planning applications) were determined within the time period. The report for 2007-08 is currently being prepared and will be published shortly.

Environment Protection: Somerset

Anne McIntosh: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs how much money has been spent in the Somerset Levels and Moors on the  (a) environmentally sensitive areas,  (b) countryside stewardship,  (c) environmental stewardship and  (d) natural England wildlife enhancement scheme.

Joan Ruddock: The question covers four schemes which cover different areas and are managed in different ways.
	The following table gives a breakdown of the spend under each scheme to date.
	
		
			  Scheme  Date parameters  Spend (£) 
			 Environmentally Sensitive Area—Management Agreements 1 January 1998 to 17 July 2008 25,361,582 
			 Environmentally Sensitive Area—Conservation Plans 1 January 1998 to 17 July 2008 620,879 
			 Wildlife Enhancement Scheme (SSSI only within the ESA) 1 April 2002 to 31 March 2008 605,532 
			 Countryside Stewardship (within the county of Somerset)—Revenue 1 January 1998 to 17 July 2008 10,558,903 
			 Countryside Stewardship (within the county of Somerset)—Capital 1 January 1998 to 17 July 2008 6,671,447 
			 Environmental Stewardship (within JCA 142)—Entry Level Stewardship 1 January 2005 to 17 July 2008 446,471 
			 Environmental Stewardship (within JCA 142)—Organic Entry Level Stewardship 1 January 2005 to 17 July 2008 421,166 
			 Environmental Stewardship (within JCA 142)—Entry Level with Higher Level Stewardship 1 January 2005 to 17 July 2008 628,379 
			 Environmental Stewardship (within JCA 142)—Organic Entry Level with Higher Level Stewardship 1 January 2005 to 17 July 2008 20,679 
		
	
	JCA 142 is the Joint Character Area for the Somerset Levels and Moors.

Fisheries: Research

Bill Wiggin: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs 
	(1)  whether he has received the final project report on By-catch Mitigation Research from the Sea Mammal Research Unit; and when the report will be made publicly available;
	(2)  how many cetaceans have been saved as a result of the UK's cetacean by-catch response strategy published in 2003;
	(3)  what government-funded research is being undertaken on cetacean by-catch; what the focus of that research is; when it will conclude; and when the results of the research will be publicly available.

Jonathan R Shaw: I refer the hon. Member to the answer I gave on 10 July 2008,  Official Report, column 1777W, for details on the Government-funded research being undertaken by the Sea Mammal Research Unit (SMRU) on cetacean by-catch mitigation. The final report of the project is due to be published in the autumn.
	Information on implementing the UK's cetacean by-catch response strategy is available on DEFRA's website.
	Further information will be made available when the annual report on the UK cetacean by-catch monitoring scheme is published.

Flood Control

Anne McIntosh: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs how many engineers are employed by  (a) the Environment Agency in England and  (b) internal drainage boards in England; and how many people will be employed by internal drainage boards after the restructuring programme is completed.

Phil Woolas: The Environment Agency estimates that it employs around 200 chartered and incorporated engineers with experience in civil, mechanical and electrical engineering but recognises that this list is not comprehensive.
	DEFRA does not record the information on Internal Drainage Board engineers.

Flood Control: Somerset

Anne McIntosh: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs how much has been spent by the Environment Agency and its predecessor bodies on flood risk management in the Somerset Levels and Moors flood plain since 1987; and how much of that money was spent on  (a) dedicated water management for nature conservation and  (b) protection of special protection areas and sites of scientific interest.

Phil Woolas: The overall cost of Flood Risk Management for the Somerset Levels and Moors area from 1987 to the current date is £28.1 million. The costs include elements of schemes and strategies that cover a larger area than the Levels and Moors but could not be separated.
	The costs associated with raised water level areas protecting sites of special scientific interest (SSSI) within the Somerset Levels and Moors since 1987 are £1.6 million, which includes construction and maintenance expenditure.
	Schemes were also undertaken where the primary driver is the DEFRA Public Service Agreement Target 3, which states that 95 per cent. of all SSSIs must be in favourable or favourable recovering condition by 2010. These SSSIs also form part of the Somerset Levels and Moors Special Protection Area and the Environment Agency's work helps to protect the integrity of the internationally important sites under the Habitats Regulation 1994.
	The Greylake Sluice and Oath Tidal Sluice schemes have both been replaced with new structures that allow greater flexibility in the control of water level management at a cost of £6.5 million combined. Similar work has also been carried out on a number of smaller structures at a combined cost of £3.5 million. Additional small schemes are also planned in the future. The costs formulated are only those of the Environment Agency.

Heating: Carbon Emissions

Lembit �pik: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what estimates his Department has made of the potential carbon dioxide savings of replacing D-rated and below energy circulator pumps with A-rated energy circulator pumps in  (a) domestic and  (b) non-domestic properties in the UK.

Joan Ruddock: The Government's Market Transformation Programme estimates, based on sales data from 2006, the potential carbon savings of replacing D-rated and below energy labelled circulator pumps with A-rated energy labelled circulator pumps would be about 0.1 megatonnes of carbon for domestic properties and about 0.3 megatonnes of carbon for non domestic properties.

Marine Management Organisation

David Drew: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs for what reasons trades unions in his Department were not consulted before the status of the proposed Marine Management Organisation was determined in January 2007.

Jonathan R Shaw: There have been two formal consultations on the Marine Bill including proposals for the establishment of a Marine Management Organisation (MMO). These were undertaken in accordance with the Government's consultation criteria. The trade unions therefore had two opportunities to provide comments on part of the process. Officials have also met regularly with the trade unions to discuss the Marine Bill, implementation of the MMO and related issues.

Pesticides

Martin Horwood: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what estimate he has made of the volume and proportion of the annual potato crop which has been treated with anti-blight spray in each of the last three years.

Phil Woolas: Anti-blight sprays are applied to main crop potatoes. Data from recent pesticide usage surveys indicates that approximately 97 per cent. of the crop is treated each year. Estimates for the volume of harvested UK production treated for blight are:
	2007: 5.3m tonnes;
	2006: 5.4m tonnes;
	2005: 5.6m tonnes.

Pollution: Hertfordshire

Oliver Heald: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what assessment he has made of the effect of the Sandridge bromate contamination on  (a) the Mimram River and  (b) chalk aquifers in Hertfordshire.

Phil Woolas: The River Mimram lies outside the area of contamination. Sampling has shown that groundwater between the plume and the Mimram contains no bromate. Given this data and the generally stable nature of the plume the Environment Agency is confident that the Mimram is not, and will not be, subject to contamination by bromate.
	Contamination of the chalk aquifer in Hertfordshire extends 20 km from Sandridge to the Lee Valley between Ware and Turnford, which includes Hoddesdon and Broxbourne. One borehole has been taken out of use for public supply. The contamination has restricted the use that can be made of seven other public supply boreholes and three private boreholes. The three private boreholes are all close to Sandridge. Concentrations of bromate and the size of the plume show no change with time.

Recycling: Low Income

Jim Cunningham: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what steps the Government  (a) has taken and  (b) plans to take to assist low income families with recycling.

Joan Ruddock: We do not consider that low income groups are less able to reduce and recycle their waste than those on higher incomes. However we encourage local authorities to consider any groups that may require extra support and how best to provide this.

Rural Areas: Population

David Drew: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs if he will assess the effect of the implementation of his Department's definition of sustainability on population growth in rural areas; and if he will make a statement.

Jonathan R Shaw: The goal of sustainable development is to enable all people to enjoy a better quality of life, without compromising the quality of life of future generations.
	For the UK Government and the devolved Administrations, that goal will be pursued in an integrated way through a sustainable, innovative and productive economy that delivers high levels of employment; and a just society that promotes social inclusion, sustainable communities and personal wellbeing in all communities, rural and urban These principles will be carried forward through four priorities for action:
	Sustainable consumption and production;
	Climate change and energy;
	Natural resource protection and environmental enhancement; and
	Sustainable communities.
	And it is in working on all four of these that we will achieve our sustainable development objectives.

Seas and Oceans: Nature Conservation

Bill Wiggin: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs for what reasons the Dogger Bank has not been formally approved as a proposed offshore Special Areas of Conservation; and when he expects the approval process to be resolved.

Jonathan R Shaw: Survey of the Dogger Bank was not completed in time for this site to be included among those in respect of which the Joint Nature Conservation Committee launched a consultation process at the end of last year. It is hoped that we will be able to include this site in next year's tranche of offshore Special Areas of Conservation, to be notified to the European Commission by the end of August 2009.

Seas and Oceans: Nature Conservation

Bill Wiggin: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what proportion of the UK territorial waters will need to be protected as Special Areas of Conservation to meet the UK's obligations under the EU Habitats' Directive.

Jonathan R Shaw: Given that the Habitats Directive requires us to protect sites containing particular types of habitat, it is not possible to make an estimate of the sea area likely to be affected by designation in the absence of completed surveys of the sea-bed in UK offshore waters. The survey process is ongoing.

Seas and Oceans: Nature Conservation

Bill Wiggin: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what proportion of the UK's seas must be protected to achieve Good Environmental Status as required under the EU Maritime Strategy Directive.

Jonathan R Shaw: The Marine Strategy Framework Directive, which came into force on 15 July 2008, applies to all marine waters under the UK's jurisdiction.
	The directive requires member states to carry out an initial assessment of the state of their seas and to determine in more detail what Good Environmental Status means for their marine waters by July 2012. Until this work has been completed we will not be in a position to assess what the programme of measures will need to comprise of in order to achieve Good Environmental Status.
	The directive also requires member states to cooperate with other member states in their marine region to ensure the requirements of the directive are coordinated at a regional level. The UK will be using its role within the OSPAR Convention to pursue this aspect of the directive.

Trees: Diseases

Roger Williams: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what estimate he has made of the incidence of  (a) bleeding canker in horse chestnut trees,  (b) sudden oak death,  (c) oak processionary moth and  (d) defoliation of horse chestnuts by the leaf-mining caterpillar cameraria ohridella in the last 12 months.

Joan Ruddock: Information and survey reports on all of these pests have been published on the Forestry Commission website.
	A survey of horse chestnut ( Aesculus hippocastanum) in Great Britain was undertaken between June and August 2007. This was to provide information, based on visual assessment of symptoms, on the likely incidence and severity of the disease known as Horse Chestnut Bleeding Canker, caused by  Pseudomonas syringae pathovar aesculi. I will arrange for a copy of the survey report to be placed in the Library of the House.
	In 2004, the Forestry Commission carried out a major survey of woodlands in Great Britain to determine whether there was any evidence of the pathogen  Phytophthora ramorum, referred to in the USA as 'Sudden Oak Death'. Further surveys have been carried out each year and since. I will arrange for a copy of the Report on the Forestry Commission Re-Survey of Woodlands 2007 to Assess the Level of Incidence of  Phytophthora ramorum and  Phytophthora kernoviae in woodlands in England and Wales to be placed in the Library of the House.
	The Oak Processionary Moth was first found in London in 2006. I will arrange for a copy of the Report on survey for Oak Processionary Moth  Thaumetopoea processionea (Linnaeus) (Lepidoptera: Thaumetopoeidae) (OPM) in London in 2007 to be placed in the Library of the House. Surveys this year suggest that the outbreak area has not expanded and in many locations, the numbers of new nests has been significantly reduced.
	 Cameraria ohridella, the Horse Chestnut Leaf Miner, was first detected in Wimbledon in 2002. Since then, it has continued to spread outwards and is now found as far north as South Yorkshire and in East Anglia and parts of Wales.

Waste Disposal

Eric Pickles: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what steps  (a) his Department and  (b) the Waste and Resources Action Programme is taking to improve advice services provided to local authorities on local waste collections.

Joan Ruddock: The Government funded Waste and Resources Action Programme (WRAP)'s recycling and organics technical advisory team (ROTATE) provides advice to local authorities in England and Northern Ireland on reducing residual waste for disposal, increasing recycling and diversion from landfill and waste prevention.
	The advisory service is free. So far, over 300 local authorities have benefited from WRAP's local authority advisory service on their collection programmes for kerbside, civic amenity and bring schemes. Areas where advice is provided include collections and recycling, waste prevention and monitoring and evaluation. The service has been improved this year by integrating support for local communications with advice on collection systems so that authorities will receive a more comprehensive service. The service has also been extended to include support for authorities preparing business cases for PFI funding to ensure that they can meet the required level of recycling.

Departmental Alcoholic Drinks

David Simpson: To ask the Secretary of State for Northern Ireland what measures are in place in his Department to monitor expenditure on alcohol for hospitality purposes.

Paul Goggins: The amount spent on alcohol cannot be separated from other hospitality expenditure except at disproportionate cost.
	The Department has specific guidance on the provision of hospitality in accordance with the principles of Managing Public Money and the Treasury handbook on regularity and propriety.

Departmental Alcoholic Drinks

David Simpson: To ask the Secretary of State for Northern Ireland what purchasing process is used by his Department for the procurement of alcohol for hospitality purposes.

Paul Goggins: The Northern Ireland Office purchases alcohol via contracted suppliers in line with Government Procurement rules.

Cultural Heritage

Eric Pickles: To ask the Secretary of State for Culture, Media and Sport how many and what proportion of the properties on the English Heritage At Risk register are in public ownership.

Margaret Hodge: Nationally, 149 (15 per cent.) Grade 1 and Grade 2 Star listed buildings on the English Heritage, Heritage at Risk Register are in public ownership.
	In London, where Grade 2 listed buildings at risk are included on the Heritage at Risk Register in addition to Grade 1 and Grade 2 Star buildings, the percentage of publicly owned buildings is 21 per cent.

Departmental Information Officers

Mark Hoban: To ask the Secretary of State for Culture, Media and Sport what the average cost to his Department was of employing a press and media officer in 2007-08.

Gerry Sutcliffe: Press and media officers in the Department for Culture, Media and Sport operate at two salary levels. The average salaries (which include a specialist allowance of 4,000) as at the 31 March 2008 are shown in the table.
	
		
			   
			   Pay band  Average press/media officer salary 
			 Grade A 42,770-52,985 49,343 
			 Grade B 27,560-35,335 33,218 
		
	
	In addition to salary there are other employer costs such as employer's pension; employers national insurance costs, overtime payments and overheads.
	 Note
	Press and media officers have been defined as the frontline staff dealing with the media. Support staff and staff whose main job is more of a management role, such as Head of News are excluded.

Departmental Secondment

John McDonnell: To ask the Secretary of State for Culture, Media and Sport how many staff in his Department were  (a) on loan from other government departments,  (b) on loan from other organisations,  (c) on secondment from other government departments and  (d) on secondment from other organisations in each of the last five years, broken down by pay band.

Gerry Sutcliffe: In the Department for Culture, Media and Sport the number of staff by pay band/Grade on loan from other Government Departments in each of the last five years  (a) is shown in Table 1. There were no loans from other organisations  (b).
	
		
			  Table 1: Loans from other Government Departments 
			   31 March each year 
			   2004  2005  2006  2007  2008 
			 SCS 6 3 4 5 5 
			 A(U) (Gd6) 2 3 4 5 4 
			 A (Gd7) 15 15 17 12 15 
			 HEOD 4 2 3 3 1 
			 B (HEO) 40 32 44 40 34 
			 C(EO) 12 24 28 40 30 
			 D (AO/AA) 15 14 23 16 7 
			 Total 94 93 123 121 96 
		
	
	There were no staff on secondment from other Government Departments  (c). The number of staff on secondment from other organisations by pay band/Grade during the last five years  (d) is shown in Table 2.
	
		
			  Table 2: Inward secondments 
			   1 April  each year 
			   2004  2005  2006  2007  2008 
			 SCS   2 1  
			 A(U) (Gd6)  
			 A (Gd7) 4 4  1  
			 HEOD  
			 B (HEO) 5 6 5 2 2 
			 C(EO) 5 2 2 1 2 
			 D (AO/AA)  1 2 2 1 
			 Total 14 13 11 7 5

Sports: Finance

Hugh Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for Culture, Media and Sport what consultations the Big Lottery Fund undertakes with Sport England before making grants for sport-related activities; and if he will make a statement.

Gerry Sutcliffe: holding answer 21 July 2008
	The BIG Lottery Fund has advised that BIG and Sport England liaise frequently on matters of mutual interest, including BIG's sport related programmes.
	The knowledge and expertise of Sport England, working in partnership with BIG on its New Opportunities in PE and Sport programme, has been vital in ensuring the programme is a success. BIG (and its predecessor body, the New Opportunities Fund) and Sport England have also worked jointly to fund programmes and projects when it is felt that they can support each other to meet each organisation's objectives, including the Active England and Awards For All programmes and the Active Places database of sports facilities.

Public Sector: Pay

Paul Burstow: To ask the Leader of the House what the median relevant increase for the public sector groups which will in future be used in the uprating formula for the salaries of hon. Members was in each of the last 10 years.

Helen Goodman: The information requested is not easily obtainable within the normal timescales for answering written parliamentary questions. I will write to the hon. Member with the information shortly.
	 Substantive answer from Helen Goodman to Paul Burstow:
	I promised to write in response to your Parliamentary Question of 9 July asking what the median relevant increase for the public sector groups which will in future be used in the uprating formula for the salaries of hon. Members was in each of the last 10 years.
	In order to determine the median relevant increase for the last 10 years data needed to be gathered from a range of Government Departments and this led to the slight delay in responding.
	The median increase for the public sector groups which will in future be used in the uprating formula for hon. Member's salaries in each of the last 10 years is as set out below:
	
		
			   Percentage 
			 2008 2.25 
			 2007 2.5 
			 2006 3.0 
			 2005 2.8 
			 2004 2.9 
			 2003 3.6 
			 2002 3.6 
			 2001 3.275 
			 2000 3.3 
			 1999 3.5 
		
	
	I hope that this is helpful.
	I am placing a copy of this letter in the House of Commons library.

Redundancy Pay

Lynne Jones: To ask the Leader of the House what redundancy package is available for hon. Members' staff; what the reasons are for its provisions; and if she will make a statement.

Helen Goodman: Members' staff contracts specify that individuals who are made redundant qualify for payment in accordance with the statutory requirement, an amount which is based on age and length of service. Such payments are subject to a minimum of two years continuous employment.
	In addition to the basic contractual entitlement, Members have the discretion to make a matching redundancy payment to staff from their Staffing Allowance or from the Winding Up Allowance made available to them on leaving the House.
	For Members who leave at a general election, or who stand down at other times, any contractual redundancy payment is charged to central funds and not parliamentary allowances.
	Members who choose to restructure their offices during a Parliament and in the process make staff redundant, must fund redundancy payments from their parliamentary allowances.
	These arrangements were approved by the Members Estimate Committee after discussion by the Advisory Panel on Members' Allowances.

Aircraft

Norman Baker: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what aircraft types are used for scheduled domestic passenger flights in the UK; and what the passenger capacity is of each.

Jim Fitzpatrick: holding answer 17 July 2008
	A table showing the aircraft types used for scheduled domestic passenger flights in the UK in 2007 and their passenger capacity (based on average seats per flight) has been placed in the Libraries of the House.
	The data has been provided to the Department by the Civil Aviation Authority (CAA); it is not published by the CAA.

Aircraft

Norman Baker: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what aircraft types are used for scheduled domestic passenger flights in the UK; and what distance was travelled on such flights by each aircraft of each type in each of the last three years.

Jim Fitzpatrick: holding answer 21 July 2008
	Tables showing the aircraft types used for scheduled domestic passenger flights in the UK in 2005, 2006 and 2007 and the distance travelled by each have been placed in the Library of the House.
	The data have been provided to the Department by the Civil Aviation Authority (CAA); it is not published by the CAA.

Biofuels

David Drew: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what discussions she  (a) has had and  (b) plans to have with the British biofuels industry on the implications of the Gallagher review.

Jim Fitzpatrick: A number of stakeholders from the British biofuels industry made detailed submissions to Professor Gallagher's team during the course of the review, and these were taken carefully into account. Industry representatives also participated in the stakeholder workshop at which the initial findings from the background studies were discussed, and at the 9 July seminar at which Professor Gallagher presented his findings.
	The Department has had and will continue to have regular discussions with representatives from the British biofuel industry, both at official and ministerial level. The Gallagher review's findings and the Government's response to them will feature prominently in these discussions over the months ahead.
	The Government have stated that it intends to consult formally on slowing down the rate of increase in the renewable transport fuel obligation, taking the level to 5 per cent. (by volume) by 2013-14, in line with Professor Gallagher's recommendation. This consultation is likely to commence later in the year, and the responses from the British biofuel industry will be taken carefully into account.

Departmental Alcoholic Drinks

David Simpson: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what measures are in place in her Department to monitor expenditure on alcohol for hospitality purposes.

Jim Fitzpatrick: The Department's guidance on hospitality does not encourage expenditure or consumption of alcohol. Where it is demonstrated that alcohol is to be consumed in context of a particular event and in conjunction with food, express permission from a senior manager is required.

Driving Under the Influence

Jim Cunningham: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what recent steps the Government has taken to reduce levels of drink-driving.

Jim Fitzpatrick: I refer my hon. Friend to the answer I gave him on 13 June 2008,  Official Report, column 541W.

Heathrow Airport

Theresa Villiers: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what discussions she had with BAA on landing charges at an expanded Heathrow in the six months before the publication of the Adding Capacity at Heathrow consultation document.

Jim Fitzpatrick: The Secretary of State for Transport has held regular meetings with BAA, including during the six months before the publication of the Adding Capacity at Heathrow Airport consultation document. These have covered a range of issues pertinent to BAA airports including Heathrow. Landing charges at an expanded Heathrow airport would be a matter for BAA and CAA, and were not discussed at these meetings.

Lorries: Driving Offences

Paul Flynn: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport how many drivers' hours offences were detected in  (a) 2005,  (b) 2006 and  (c) 2007; and what proportion of these were committed by drivers of left-hand drive heavy goods vehicles.

Jim Fitzpatrick: The Vehicle and Operator Services Agency (VOSA) does not record whether an HGV is left or right hand drive.
	It would seem reasonable that the majority of Foreign Heavy Goods Vehicles (HGV)'s are left hand drive, except for those from the Republic of Ireland.
	
		
			  Financial Year  Prohibited for drivers' hours, tachograph and records  O f which :  Eire vehicles 
			  2007-08   
			 UK 7,339  
			 Foreign 7,329 2,310 
			 Total 14,668  
			
			  2006-07   
			 UK 4,901  
			 Foreign 6,376 1,040 
			 Total 11,277  
			
			  2005-06   
			 UK 6,182  
			 Foreign 4,403 1,578 
			 Total 10,585

Lorries: Exhaust Emissions

Roger Williams: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what assessment she has made of the effects of a  (a) particulate and  (b) carbon dioxide emissions limit on the fuel efficiency of lorries.

Jim Fitzpatrick: Where the particulate emissions limit is sufficiently strict as to oblige manufacturers to use a diesel particulate filter, as the future Euro VI standard proposed by the European Commission may be, the associated fuel consumption penalty would be likely to be between 2 and 3 per cent. if no offsetting improvements to engine or vehicle technology were made.
	In principle, because carbon dioxide is a direct consequence of the combustion of hydrocarbon fuels, the imposition of a carbon dioxide emissions limit for lorries would, if it were lower than the current average emissions rate, reduce fuel consumption proportionately. The imposition of a carbon dioxide emission limit for lorries, would be technically very difficult and deliver limited environmental benefits.

M6: Accidents

Jim Cunningham: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport 
	(1)  what steps the Government has taken to reduce the number of serious car accidents on the M6;
	(2)  what steps the Government has taken to improve the safety of junctions on the M6.

Tom Harris: The Highways Agency continually monitors and studies safety on the M6 and all other routes for which it is responsible.
	Over the last five years, it has completed over 25 improvements to the M6 motorway at various locations along its approximately 230 mile length to enhance safety both on the motorway and at junctions.
	These improvements include: junction widening, signalisation of junctions, the use of high-friction surfacing, better road markings and an innovative technique developed to manage traffic on slip-roads, known as Ramp Metering.
	Further safety improvements continue to be identified and will be implemented as part of the steps to address the 2010 casualty reduction targets.

M6: Accidents

Jim Cunningham: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what steps the Government plans to take to reduce the number of serious car accidents at the Catthorpe junction on the M6.

Tom Harris: The Highways Agency (HA) has already completed a number of interim measures to improve safety at this junction.
	In March 2007, the hard shoulder of the M6 to M1 slip-road was converted to a running lane. Additional signs were installed on the M6 to give advanced warning to motorists of queuing traffic and yellow box markings and 'merge in turn' signs were installed at the junction itself, to help regulate traffic movements.
	Currently the HA is investigating significant further measures for longer term improvement, and a number of options are currently under public consultation. Subject to the necessary statutory processes being completed and the availability of funding, work could start in summer 2011.

Railway Network

Don Foster: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what the budget of her Department's Rail Group was in each of the last five years.

Tom Harris: Government expenditure on rail between 2002-03 and 2007-08 along with spending plans for 2008-09 and 2009-10 is set out the Department for Transport annual report. A copy of the relevant table is reproduced as follows:
	
		
			   Outturn  Estimated outturn  Plans 
			   2001-02  2002-03  2003-04  2004-05  2005-06  2006-07  2007-08  2008-09( 1)  2009-10( 1) 
			 Net Direct Support for Passenger Rail Services 738 930 (2)1,225 878 813 847 684 449 (250) 
			 Grants to PTE's 214 245 294 277 199 313 310 323 329 
			 Direct Grants to Network Rail 499 (3)792 1,448 2,058 1,984 (4)3,103 3,154 3,224 3,066 
			 CTRL Grants 342 1,362 1,295 312 385 102 154 88 90 
			 Freight Grants(5) 57 49 32 26 5 0 0 0 0 
			 Other(6) 273 390 394 296 104 84 72 74 76 
			 Total 2,134 3,768 4,688 3,847 3,490 4,449 4,374 4,158 3,311 
			 (1) Total expenditure and the mix between support for passenger rail services and direct grants to Network Rail may be subject to revision as part of the regulatory review into Network Rail's income which is currently being conducted by the Office of Rail Regulation.  (2) Figure includes 700 million paid directly to train operating companies that was subsequently deemed to be in respect of capital investment undertaken by Network Rail.  (3) Figure includes a grant payment of 300 million to Network Rail to facilitate the purchase of Railtrack.  (4) From 2006-07 onwards responsibility for paying grants to Network Rail for the rail network in Scotland has been transferred to Scottish Ministers. Spending plans in this table from 2006-07 onwards are in respect of the English and Welsh elements of the railway.  (5) Responsibility for the payment of Freight Grants transferred from the SRA to Logistics Division in DfT on 26 June 2005. The figure in this table shows spending by the SRA prior to that transfer.  (6) Figures include payments in respect of rail industry pensions, external costs in connection with specifying and procuring rail franchises and in managing rail projects and payments to The British Transport Police, the Rail Passengers Council, the Rail Heritage Committee and British Rail (Residuary) Ltd.   Note:  Prior to 2004-05 expenditure relates to spending by the Strategic Rail Authority (SRA) and the Department for Transport. During 2005-06 the functions and spending of the Strategic Rail Authority (SRA) were progressively transferred to the Department for Transport in accordance with the Railways Act 2005. This table represents the combined spending of the SRA and its predecessor bodies, the DfT Rail Directorate prior to the relevant parts of the Railways Act being commenced and the new DfT Rail Group. From 2006-07 onwards figures show planned spending by DfT.

Railway Network: Manpower

Don Foster: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport how many full-time equivalent members of staff  (a) her Department and  (b) public bodies her Department is responsible for employ on tasks related to the railway; how many of those work on (i) project management, (ii) project oversight and (iii) financial oversight; and what plans she has for future staffing.

Tom Harris: The National Networks Group have 336 full-time equivalent members of staff, of this number, 70 are employed in project management and project oversight and 58 are employed on financial oversight. Plans for future staffing will be agreed in next year's round of business planning beginning October 2008.

Road Signs and Markings: Tourism

David Wright: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport 
	(1)  what plans she has to review provisions for signage to tourist attractions on major highways;
	(2)  if she will consider introducing special highway signage to indicate UK World Heritage sites.

Rosie Winterton: There are no plans to review national policy for signing to tourist attractions on major highways. The Department is, however, currently considering the scope of its planned general review of traffic signs policy.
	There is a range of prescribed signs to tourist destinations including places of architectural or historical interest, and sporting and leisure facilities. It is also open to highway authorities to apply for authorisation to place non prescribed tourist signs on the public highway. Any such applications are considered strictly on a case-by-case basis; and every effort is made to accommodate the needs of tourist industry stakeholders while ensuring that safety and traffic management needs are not compromised.

Transport: Costs

Norman Baker: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what estimate she has made of the percentage change in real terms of the cost of travelling by  (a) private car,  (b) bus and  (c) train since (i) 1979 and (ii) 1997; and what estimate she has made of the proportion of average disposable income represented by such costs in each case in each year.

Rosie Winterton: holding answer 10 June 2008
	 The following table shows the percentage change in real terms of the cost of travelling by car, bus and train since 1979 and 1997 compared to 2007 in the UK.
	
		
			  Percentage 
			   (i) 1979 to 2007  (ii) 1997 to 2007 
			  (a) Private car -10 -8 
			  (b) Bus +49 +13 
			  (c) Train +44 +5 
			  Source:  Retail Price Index (Annual)Office for National Statistics 
		
	
	The changes are against a background of an increase in disposable income of 105 per cent. between 1979 and 2007 and 27 per cent. between 1997 and 2007. The decline in the real term cost of travelling by car reflects the significant impact of the decline in real terms cost of purchasing a vehicle.
	While the cost of motoring has fallen in real terms, the overall UK expenditure on motoring has increased over this period as, the estimated number of cars per household has increased from 0.75 in 1979, to 1.02 in 1997 and 1.15 in 2006.
	According to the available data from the Expenditure and Food Survey carried out by the Office for National Statistics, motoring costs were 10 per cent. of household disposable income in 1978, 14 per cent. in 1997-98 and 12 per cent. in 2006.
	Fares and other travel costs were 3 per cent. of household disposable income in 1978, 2 per cent. in 1997-98 and 2 per cent. in 2006.

Transport: Nuclear Fuels

Norman Baker: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what discussions she has had with L'Autorit de sėret nuclaire (ASN) on its refusal to give further authorisations for plutonium shipments from Sellafield to the Areva plant at La Hague following receipt of a consignment of UK plutonium from Sellafield on 21 May; and what steps have been taken in response to the issues highlighted by ASN.

Jim Fitzpatrick: As a result of discussion between this Department and L'Autorite de surete nucleaire (ASN) regarding the shipment of plutonium by Sellafield Ltd in May, and our subsequent investigations, we took regulatory action to prevent further shipments of plutonium from Sellafield in the same manner. ASN has not itself taken any regulatory action.
	Sellafield Ltd has appealed the action. Until that appeal process is concluded Sellafield Ltd is prohibited from making any further shipments of this type of plutonium in the same manner.

Transport: Pressure Groups

Norman Baker: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport on how many occasions Ministers and officials from her Department have met representatives of  (a) Hacan Clearskies,  (b) Plane Stupid,  (c) Greenpeace and  (d) Friends of the Earth since January 2006.

Jim Fitzpatrick: holding answer 14 July 2008
	 I met with a number of representatives from environmental groups, including Greenpeace and Friends of the Earth, on 11 July 2007. My right hon. Friend the Secretary of State met a number of representatives from this list on 10 September 2007, and met with Greenpeace on 21 February 2008 and 10 September 2007. The then Secretary of State (the right hon. Member for Paisley and Renfrewshire, South) met with Greenpeace on 28 June 2006 and his predecessor, the right hon. Member for Edinburgh, South-West, met with environmental groups including Greenpeace and Friends of the Earth on 2 June 2006.
	In addition, I met with a range of environmental and special interest groups, including all of those listed above, on 21 November 2007 in connection with the Department's consultation on adding capacity at Heathrow.
	Officials meet representatives from environmental groups, including Friends of the Earth and Greenpeace, regularly, for example in meetings of the External Advisory Group on the Air Transport White Paper, or on an ad hoc basis to discuss specific issues. Officials also regularly meet with representatives of Hacan ClearSkies at the bi-monthly Heathrow Airport Consultative Committee meetings of which Hacan is a member.

Afghanistan: Peacekeeping Operations

Adam Price: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence pursuant to the answer of 24 June 2008,  Official Report, column 175W, on Afghanistan: peacekeeping operations, what the name was of each of the deceased; what the date was of each incident; what the  (a) location was and  (b) circumstances were of each incident; what the cause of death was in each case; and what the status is of each investigation.

Des Browne: The details of the investigations referred to in the previous answer are shown in the following table. I am withholding the names of the deceased for privacy reasons and to protect the security of the families of locally employed personnel.
	
		
			  Date  Location  Circumstances  Cause of death  Investigation status 
			 14 November 2005 Kabul Local national allegedly shot by UK forces carrying out force protection procedures Gunshot wound Closed 
			 19 May 2007 Gereshk Locally employed translator killed by an improvised explosive device Injuries from explosion Closed 
			 2 July 2007 Kandahar Local nationals allegedly shot by UK forces carrying out force protection procedures Gunshot wound Open 
			 7 November 2007 Kabul Local national allegedly shot by UK forces carrying out force protection procedures Gunshot wound Closed 
			 30 November 2007 Kajaki Locally employed translator Injuries killed by an improvised explosive device Injuries from explosion Closed 
			 24 December 2007 Baghran Local nationals allegedly killed by UK weapon effects Gunshot wounds Open 
			 3 April 2008 Now Zad Local national allegedly killed by UK weapon effects Mortar fire Open

Armed Forces: Gyms

Liam Fox: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence 
	(1)  what his Department's policy is on charging service personnel for use of garrison gyms;
	(2)  whether service personnel will be charged for the use of super-garrison gyms.

Derek Twigg: In Army garrisons, personnel use the gym facilities free of charge. At Aldershot and Tidworth where a public finance initiative contractor and local authority run the local sports and leisure centres, personnel are charged for using these facilities for non-military (i.e. personal) training outside of core hours. In both cases a small administration fee is charged for health and safety induction processes as well as swipe cards.
	Although super garrisons are still at the concept stage, there are currently no plans to charge personnel for the use of gyms.

Armed Forces: Health Services

Liam Fox: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what the waiting list targets for  (a) Ministry of Defence hospital units,  (b) regional rehabilitation units and  (c) Departments of Community Mental Health are; and what progress has been made towards these targets in each year since 2003.

Derek Twigg: Since Financial Year (FY) 2006-07 targets for Ministry of Defence Hospital Units (MDHUs) are for a percentage of patients to attend an outpatients appointment within four weeks of referral by their GP and, with a decision to admit, for a percentage of patients to receive treatment within six weeks; this equates to a 10 week care pathway from referral to treatment for those who need it. The average of targets placed on MDHUs and the actual performance against these targets since 2006-07 and 2007-08 are shown in the following table. Targets for 2008-09 are currently being negotiated with individual NHS hospital authorities that host MDHUs.
	
		
			   Percentage of Patients to be seen as an outpatient within four weeks  Percentage of Patients to receive treatment within 6 weeks of decision to admit 
			   Target  Actual  Target  Actual 
			 2006-07 61 59 56 61 
			 2007-08 67 53 59 59 
		
	
	These targets are more stringent than the current NHS target of 18 weeks from GP referral to treatment for 85 per cent of patients. The contracts MOD holds with MDHU hosting hospitals enables accelerated access for Service patients to rapidly return them to combat effectiveness.
	Prior to 2006, targets for outpatients appointments at all MDHUs were for 45 per cent. of patients to be seen within four weeks of GP referral and 90 per cent. within 13 weeks. Following a decision to admit for treatment, the target was for 80 per cent. of patients to be treated within 13 weeks; this equates to a total care pathway of between 17 and 26 weeks from referral to treatment for those who needed it.
	
		
			   Percentage of patients to be seen as an outpatient within four weeks  Percentage of patients to be seen as an outpatient within 13 weeks  Percentage of patients to receive treatment within 13 weeks of decision to admit 
			   Target  Actual  Target  Actual  Target  Actual 
			 2003-04 45 46 90 87 80 77 
			 2004-05 45 46 90 93 80 75 
			 2005-06 45 46 90 93 80 74 
		
	
	Regional Rehabilitation Unit targets since 2006 are that, from point of referral, 100 per cent. of patients should attend an RRU within 10 working days; in the majority of cases this target is being met. Areas exceeding the target time are those experiencing high operational tempo (RRUs situated near to or within garrisons with a large numbers of troops returning from deployment); waiting times in these cases can be up to 15 days. Implementation of the recommendations of the recent Rehabilitation Review, which reported in May 2008, will re-balance resources to address this.
	Prior to the creation of the RRUs in 2005 the policy was that following an assessment by a GP or physiotherapist that a patient commenced treatment within seven days.
	Departments of Community Mental Health targets (DCMH) since 2004 are for 100 per cent of urgent cases to receive an appointment the next working day and for 100 per cent of routine cases to be seen within 20 working days; these targets are being met, except in circumstances where the patient does not attend the arranged appointment. In addition, the target for access to in-patient care is four hours if deemed an emergency by Community Mental Health Units.
	I am unable to provide information on performance for RRUs and DCMHs for the years prior to those shown above as records are not readily available and it would incur disproportionate cost to produce data.

Armed Forces: Housing

Liam Fox: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence how many and what percentage of the  (a) single living and  (b) service family accommodation provided by his Department in (i) the UK and (ii) overseas meets the decent home standard.

Derek Twigg: We have not carried out a specific comparison with the Decent Homes Standard for either Service Family Accommodation (SFA) or Single Living Accommodation (SLA).
	The Ministry of Defence (MOD) has its own well defined criteria for assessing the condition of its properties. For the majority of SFA, this consists of a list of over 100 individual attributes that are assessed to arrive at an overall Standard for Condition (SfC) score for the property. SfC scores are banded into categories, S1fC the highest to S4fC the lowest. SfC assessment includes aspects such as the structure of the property, its energy efficiency, health and safety features, security arrangements and sanitary items as well as an assessment of the kitchen and bedrooms. On that basis, the majority of SFA is already at either S1fC or S2fC. This includes over 12,800 properties that have been upgraded to S1fC since 2001. By the end of this financial year, no Service family will have to live in S4fC accommodation.
	We are confident that the current SfC system used by the Department fully takes into account the four basic tenets of the Decent Homes Standard. Rather than simply conforming to a minimum acceptable level of accommodation, MOD aspires to provide accommodation to a higher standard; and this is reflected in the criteria that must be met to achieve S1fC. (All eight categories must score at Standard 1 for the overall Standard for Condition to be 1).

Armed Forces: Housing

Bob Russell: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence when all housing accommodation for families of military personnel will be brought up to the highest ranked standard.

Derek Twigg: The Department is committed to providing decent accommodation for service personnel and their families.
	Addressing accommodation issues globally is one of our top priorities, but this will take time as there is no quick fix to dealing with a legacy of decades of under funding. In addition to the significant investment in recent years, the Department will spend in excess of 8 billion on accommodation in the next decade, of which of over 3 billion will be on improvements and upgrades.
	Since 2001, some 13,000 service family accommodation properties have been upgraded to the top of four standards for condition, with a further 600 of the worse condition properties to be upgraded this financial year and 800 in each year thereafter.
	By the end of this financial year, no service families will have to live in the lowest standard of SFA. By 2012 all SFA will be at the top two standards for condition.

Armed Forces: Manpower

Liam Fox: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what the trained  (a) requirement and  (b) strength of the (i) Territorial Army, (ii) Royal Naval Reserve, (iii) Royal Marine Reserve and (iv) Royal Auxiliary Air Force was in (A) 1997 and (B) the latest date for which figures are available.

Bob Ainsworth: Figures for the requirement are not available from 1997. The figures for 1997 and 2008 are therefore not completely comparable.
	
		
			   1997( 1)  May 2008 
			   Requirement  Total strength  Requirement  Trained strength 
			 Royal Naval Reserve (2)n/a (3)3,560 1,784 1,640 
			 Royal Marines Reserve (2) (3) 582 536 
			 Territorial Army n/a (4)51,690 30,274 19,940 
			 Royal Auxiliary Air Force n/a 1,360 2,000 778 
			 (1) Figures taken from DAS A Publication TSP07 UK Reserve and Cadets Strength at 1 April 2007. This includes trained and non-trained personnel. (4) For comparison with other Services, this number does not include non-regular permanent staff.

Armed Forces: Young People

Nick Harvey: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence how many people who joined the armed forces at age 16 and 17 years in each of the last five years sought to leave the armed forces  (a) while under 18 years old and  (b) when 18 years old or more; and how many people who joined the armed forces as adults subsequently sought to leave the UK armed forces in each of the last five years.

Bob Ainsworth: Information on the number of people who joined the armed forces at age 16 and 17 years or as adults in each of the last five years is not centrally held and could be provided only at disproportionate cost.
	Due to ongoing validation of data from the Joint Personnel Administration system voluntary outflow application data are currently unavailable. Historical information on voluntary outflow applications and exits is published in Tri-Service Publication 5, 'UK Regular Forces outflow from trained strength to civil life' (TSP 5). Copies of the most recent and historical publications can be found at
	www.dasa.mod.uk.
	Information on the intake and outflow of the UK regular forces by age published in Tri-Service Publication 19, 'UK Regular Forces Intake and Outflow by age' (TSP 19). Copies of the most recent and historical publications can be found at
	www.dasa.mod.uk.

Duchess of Kent's Psychiatric Unit: Operating Costs

Liam Fox: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what the maintenance cost of the Duchess of Kent's Psychiatric Unit was in each of the last five years of its operation.

Derek Twigg: The Duchess of Kent's psychiatric unit closed in 2003. Maintenance and works costs for the last five years of its operation are shown in the following table:
	
		
			  Financial year  Maintenance and works costs ( million) 
			 1998-99 0.9 
			 1999-2000 0.4 
			 2000-01 0.7 
			 2001-02 0.9 
			 2002-03 0.5

Nimrod Aircraft

Liam Fox: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence how many instances of fuel leaks from Nimrod aircraft have been recorded in the last 12 months.

Bob Ainsworth: I will write to the hon. Member with the information requested and place a copy of my letter in the Library of the House.
	 Substantive answer from Bob Ainsworth to Liam Fox:
	I undertook to write to you in answer to your Parliamentary Questions on 21 November 2007, (Official Report, Column 990W) and 20 May 2008 (Official Report, Column 181W) about fuel leaks from Nimrod aircraft.
	The Nimrod Integrated Project Team within Defence Equipment and Support (DES) is carrying out a detailed manual analysis of fuel leak data in order to answer your questions. Unfortunately, this is proving to be a time consuming process because the work has been disrupted by the corruption of the relevant database at RAF Kinloss. I am sorry that this has led to the delay in answering your questions, but I expect this analysis to be complete within the next four weeks.
	In November 2006, after the loss of Nimrod XV230, DES introduced new mandatory fuel leak reporting procedures (known as 'Leaflet 70 reports') on all leaks associated with fuel tanks within the fuselage, the fuel system and any residual fuel found in specific areas of the aircraft (such as the bomb bay). So far our analysis indicates that since the introduction of these procedures, 111 fuel leaks (of varying degrees of severity) have been recorded under Leaflet 70. Of course, once the outcome of the ongoing detailed analysis of fuel leak data by DES is known, I will write to you again.
	I should point out that following a recent request by the Oxfordshire Coroner relating to fuel leaks reported under Leaflet 70 we have provided the same information to him. In light of this, I was keen to ensure that you received this information as quickly as possible.
	I am copying this letter to Ian Liddell-Grainger and Sir Nicholas Winterton, who have expressed an interest in this subject.

Nimrod Aircraft

Liam Fox: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence how many fuel leakages on a Nimrod aircraft have been reported since January 2007.

Bob Ainsworth: I will write to the hon. Member.
	 Substantive answer from Bob Ainsworth to Liam Fox:
	I undertook to write to you in answer to your Parliamentary Questions on 21 November 2007, (Official Report, Column 990W) and 20 May 2008 (Official Report, Column 181W) about fuel leaks from Nimrod aircraft.
	The Nimrod Integrated Project Team within Defence Equipment and Support (DES) is carrying out a detailed manual analysis of fuel leak data in order to answer your questions. Unfortunately, this is proving to be a time consuming process because the work has been disrupted by the corruption of the relevant database at RAF Kinloss. I am sorry that this has led to the delay in answering your questions, but I expect this analysis to be complete within the next four weeks.
	In November 2006, after the loss of Nimrod XV230, DES introduced new mandatory fuel leak reporting procedures (known as 'Leaflet 70 reports') on all leaks associated with fuel tanks within the fuselage, the fuel system and any residual fuel found in specific areas of the aircraft (such as the bomb bay). So far our analysis indicates that since the introduction of these procedures, 111 fuel leaks (of varying degrees of severity) have been recorded under Leaflet 70. Of course, once the outcome of the ongoing detailed analysis of fuel leak data by DES is known, I will write to you again.
	I should point out that following a recent request by the Oxfordshire Coroner relating to fuel leaks reported under Leaflet 70 we have provided the same information to him. In light of this, I was keen to ensure that you received this information as quickly as possible.
	I am copying this letter to Ian Liddell-Grainger and Sir Nicholas Winterton, who have expressed an interest in this subject.

RAF St. Athan

Cheryl Gillan: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence if he will make an assessment of the likely effect of the construction of Olympic facilities for 2012 on availability of construction workers to work on the construction of St. Athan Defence Training Academy.

Bob Ainsworth: Officials have already assessed the impacts of construction industry demand capacity on the proposed construction of the Defence Technical Academy at St. Athan. Populating an Office of Government Commerce simulation model, the data and advice received has indicated that construction of the Olympic facilities for 2012 is not expected to cause any significant implications for the local construction environment in the Vale of Glamorgan.

Reserve Forces: Deployment

Liam Fox: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence how many reservists are serving on operations overseas, broken down by location.

Bob Ainsworth: As at 31 May 2008, Reservists are serving on operations overseas as follows:
	
		
			  Location  Op Name  Number of Reservists serving 
			 Iraq Joint Operational Area TELIC 217 
			 Afghanistan Joint Operational Area HERRICK 603 
			 Balkans OCULUS 20 
			 Cyprus TOSCA 36 
			 Global Counter-Terrorism  12 
		
	
	In addition there were a further 572 Reservists in full-time service within the UK and in other permanent joint operational bases; this includes those undergoing pre-deployment training, and those on post-deployment leave. There were also on average 50 Sponsored Reserves mobilised at any one time during this month (May 2008), most of whom will have served at one time or another in an operational area. A further 1,844 personnel were serving on Full Time Reserve Service contracts, and some of these will be in an operational area, but further details of their individual locations are not held centrally.

Vanguard Class Submarines

Gerald Howarth: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what the  (a) unit cost and  (b) date of commissioning of each Vanguard Class submarine was.

Bob Ainsworth: The commissioning dates for the four Vanguard class submarines are listed in the following table.
	
		
			  Submarine  Date commissioned 
			 HMS Vanguard 21 August 1993 
			 HMS Victorious 7 January 1995 
			 HMS Vigilant 2 November 1996 
			 HMS Vengeance 27 November 1999 
		
	
	The total procurement cost for the four submarines was 3,587 million, which equates to approximately 897 million per submarine.

GPs: Barnsley

Eric Illsley: To ask the Secretary of State for Health how many GPs there are in Barnsley; and if he will make a statement.

Ben Bradshaw: There are 128 (GPs) in the Barnsley primary care trust area. I am pleased to report that under the proposals in the NHS next stage review Barnsley PCT will be developing three additional GP surgeries and a GP-led health centre.

NHS Dentistry

Andrew George: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what recent assessment he has made of levels of access to NHS dentistry.

Ann Keen: Latest data shows that 27.3 million people saw an NHS dentist at least once in the 24 months ending December 2007.
	We are committed to increasing access to NHS dentistry, and have made this a requirement for PCTs in the NHS operating framework. We have increased dental funding by 11 per cent. this year to a total of 2.081 billion.

Patient Dignity

John Hemming: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what mechanisms are in place to ensure patient dignity in the NHS.

Ivan Lewis: Our Dignity in Care campaign aims to create zero tolerance of abuse and disrespect of older people in all care settings. Over 2,500 people have signed up as dignity champions, committed to improving dignity in their local care services.
	In October 2007, we launched the Nutrition Action Plan to address issues that emerged from the campaign about older people's nutrition. A Nutrition Action Plan Delivery Board has been set up to ensure delivery of the Action Plan commitments.
	On 30 June, we launched for consultation a groundbreaking Constitution for the NHS. The constitution enshrines the principles and values of the NHS for the future. It makes clear that patients have a right to be treated with dignity and respect.
	Also on 30 June, we published: High quality Care for All: NHS Next Stage Review Final Report, which confirms that dignity and respect should be a core value of the NHS.
	On 16 July, I (SofS) launched the End of Life Care Strategy, backed with 286 million, to provide high quality care for all adults approaching the end of their life. It will help more people to die in the setting they choose, mainly at home surrounded by loved ones. A key part of the strategy is encouraging services that respect dignity at the end of life.
	We are committed to reducing hospital mixed sex accommodation to an absolute minimum and to ensuring that where the need to treat a person takes precedence over complete gender separation, everything possible is done to maximise privacy and dignity.

NHS Next Stage Review

David Taylor: To ask the Secretary of State for Health which private health companies made submissions to the NHS next stage review.

Ben Bradshaw: Among the 200 submissions received nationally as part of the NHS Next Stage Review were submissions from BUPA, Spire Healthcare, The Priory Group, UnitedHealth Europe, Assura Group and Abbott UK.

Abortion: Drugs

David Amess: To ask the Secretary of State for Health 
	(1)  what legislation regulates the selling of abortion drugs on the internet; and if he will make a statement;
	(2)  if he will bring forward legislation to restrict the selling of abortion drugs on the internet; and if he will make a statement.

Dawn Primarolo: In the United Kingdom, there are strict legal controls on the retail sale, supply and advertisement of medicinal products which are set out in the Medicines Act 1968. These legal controls apply equally to medicines for human use sold or supplied via internet or e-mail transactions. Prescription only medicines may only be sold or supplied in accordance with a doctor's prescription at registered pharmacy premises, or by an internet pharmacy which has been approved by the Royal Pharmaceutical Society of Great Britain and bears the relevant logo, or under the supervision of a pharmacist.
	Websites supplying medicines that are based overseas, or fulfil orders from overseas, are outside the jurisdiction of the UK medicines regulatory authority.
	Generally, medicines that are brought into the UK by an individual for his or her own personal use or that of a member of his/her family are not subject to the controls of medicines legislation.
	There are no plans at this time to change medicines legislation.

Alcoholic Drinks: Misuse

Jim Cunningham: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what steps the Government plans to take to encourage young people to drink less alcohol.

Kevin Brennan: I have been asked to reply.
	The Government published the Youth Alcohol Action Plan on 2 June 2008. This document sets out a series of steps to address the problems associated with young people's alcohol consumption. These include:
	Working with the police and the courts to reduce unsupervised drinking by young people in public places, including implementing new legislation to make it an offence for under-18s to persistently possess alcohol in public places;
	Providing better information for parents on how alcohol consumption can affect young people to help them set boundaries with their children. The chief medical officer will work with experts, parents and young people to develop a set of guidelines on young people and alcohol;
	Ensuring that industry plays its part, in marketing and promoting alcohol In a more responsible way to improve the standards that currently govern these issues, making them mandatory if that proves to be necessary; and
	Supporting young people to make sensible decisions through a comprehensive communications campaign about the risks of alcohol, aimed particularly at the 11 to 15 year old age group.
	We have consulted widely on our proposals with parents, young people and other stakeholders. Later in the year we will hold a public consultation on guidelines for both parents and young people on safe and sensible drinking.

Children: Diseases

Stephen O'Brien: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what change there has been in the incidence of  (a) diphtheria,  (b) tetanus,  (c) pertussis,  (d) haemophilus influenzae type b,  (e) polio,  (f) meningitis C,  (g) measles,  (h) mumps,  (i) rubella and  (j) acellular pertussis amongst children in London in (i) 2007 and (ii) 2008 to date.

Dawn Primarolo: The information requested is in the following table.
	
		
			  Laboratory confirmed cases in children (15 years) in London 
			   2007  2008 
			 Diphtheria No cases 1 fatal case May 2008 
			 Tetanus No cases No cases to date 
			 Pertussis 36 cases(1) 26 cases to end June 2008(1) 
			 Haemophilus influenzae 9 1 case to end June 2008 
			 Polio No cases No cases to date 
			 Meningitis C 1 No cases to mid May 2008 
			 Measles 357 335 cases up to end June 2008 
			 Mumps 21 11 cases up to end June 2008 
			 Rubella 1 No cases up to end June 2008 
			 (1) Pertussis cases laboratory confirmed by culture, PCR or serology.  Note: The data in this table for 2007and 2008 is still subject to final confirmation.  Source: Health Protection Agency.

Children: Wheelchairs

Mark Harper: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what progress has been made in improving the provision of wheelchair services for children and young people since the publication of Aiming High for Disabled Children in May 2007.

Ivan Lewis: The Transforming Community Equipment and Wheelchair Services Programme (TCEWS) was set up on 2006 to design a radial new model for delivery of both community equipment and wheelchairs in England. The remit of the programme was to place service users and carers at the heart of any new service model and build on the strengths of the third and private sector. The overall aim was to develop a new high quality system for delivering equipment which would give those supported by the state the sort of choice and control they have not previously enjoyed. Responsibility for assessment if need remains with local health and social care commissioners.
	The programme has developed a business case for a new model of delivery of wheelchair services which is currently being considered.

Cholesterol: Screening

Linda Riordan: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what steps he has taken to encourage people to have regular cholesterol and blood pressure tests.

Ann Keen: The Quality and Outcomes Framework of the GP Contract includes quality indicators that provide incentives for practices to measure and control cholesterol in people with vascular disease and diabetes; and to measure and control blood pressure in people with a vascular condition, including hypertension and diabetes. In addition, one quality indicator encourages practices to check routinely the blood pressure of patients aged 45 and over.
	Putting Prevention First, published at the beginning, of April this year, outlines the Department's plans to introduce vascular checks, which will include blood pressure and cholesterol tests for all adults aged between 40 and 74.
	In the Next Stage Review, we outlined our plans for a new 'Reduce Your Risk' campaign intended to raise awareness of vascular checks and help people to stay healthy and to know when they need to get help. It will explain the importance of each of the modifiable risk factors for vascular disease, including blood pressure and diet. It will also explain the need for a risk assessment and how to access it.

Deca-BDE: Health Hazards

David Taylor: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what assessment he has made of the effect on human health of the use in industry of the flame retardant Deca-BDE; and if he will make a statement.

Phil Woolas: I have been asked to reply.
	Decabromodiphenyl ether (decaBDE) is a flame retardant used primarily in plastics and textiles applications. Over an extended period it has been subject to risk assessment action under the EU Existing Substances Regulation (EC no. 793/93); the UK (the Environment Agency) was the Rapporteur for the environmental elements of the risk assessment and France was the Rapporteur for the human health aspects.
	The conclusion of the risk assessment is that while decaBDE is very persistent in the environment, it is not on present evidence bioaccumulative, and it is not toxic. As a result it does not meet the criteria for formal risk reduction activity under the existing substances regulation.

Dental Services

Andrew George: To ask the Secretary of State for Health how many contracts for NHS dentists there were in  (a) St. Ives constituency,  (b) Cornwall and  (c) England in each year since 2000.

Ann Keen: The information is not available in the form requested for the period requested.
	The new system of local contracting has been in place only since April 2006. Under the old dental system, in place up to and including 31 March 2006, dentists worked either in general dental services (GDS) or in personal dental pilots (PDS). PDS pilots, unlike GDS, operated under a system of local contracts but information on the individual contracts agreed under those arrangements is not held centrally.
	The available information for the period since April 2006 is set out in the following tables. This is the latest information available.
	
		
			  Contracts agreed in April 2006( 1) 
			  Level  Number 
			 England 8,377 
			 South West Peninsula SHA 830 
			 Central Cornwall PCT 49 
			 North and East Cornwall PCT 22 
			 West Cornwall PCT 22 
			  Source:(1) Department of Health.   Note:  Information available only by the then primary care trust and strategic health authority. 
		
	
	
		
			  Contracts which ran for the whole of 2006-07 
			  Level  Number 
			 England 7,990 
			 South West SHA 830 
			  Source:  NHS Business Services Authority Dental Services Division.   Note:  Information available only at England level and by current strategic health authority.

Dental Services

Philip Hollobone: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what assessment has been made of the effects of the new dentists' contract on numbers of  (a) patient registrations and  (b) dentists.

Ann Keen: The Department assessed the impact of the first eighteen months of the dental reforms in its' written evidence to the Health Select Committee. This evidence was submitted in December 2007 and published by the committee on 4 February 2008 at:
	www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm200708/cmselect/cmhealth/289/289ii.pdf
	The written evidence set out how the reforms have helped lay a solid foundation for locally commissioned dental services. It covered among other areas access, quality and workforce and how the Department is working, with the national health service and stakeholders, to improve services further.
	In addition, in order to identify and spread good practice, the Department announced in March that there will be an evaluation of how local commissioning is working in terms of the patient experience. This will look at both access and quality of services, and the incentives it offers to increase access and encourage prevention and health promotion, as well as treatment. It will also set out a vision for NHS dentistry in five years time. The evaluation is expected to be completed by the end of the year.

Diabetes: Health Services

Adrian Sanders: To ask the Secretary of State for Health 
	(1)  what arrangements are in place to manage the transition from paediatric to adult services for young people with diabetes; and what guidance his Department has given to primary care trusts to ensure the transition takes place at the appropriate time and is negotiated with and planned around the needs of each individual young person;
	(2)  whether his Department is undertaking an assessment of the implementation of Making Every Young Person with Diabetes Matter.

Ann Keen: It is for local national health service organisations to make their own arrangements to manage the transition from paediatric to adult services for young people with diabetes. The 2007 report Making Every Young Person with Diabetes Matter (copies of which have already been placed in the Library) gives support and guidance on managing the transition period, as well as other aspects of diabetes care for children and young people. Implementation of this guidance will be continually reviewed and will also be assessed through the Child Health and Maternity Services mapping exercise, which aims to create an inventory of all dedicated child health services provided in England.
	In the 2007 Child Health Mapping returns, of 242 general paediatric services, 207 (86 per cent.) provided services for children and young people with diabetes, 148 of which had protocols in place for transition to adult diabetes services, and 134 provided a diabetes transition key-worker on all, or most, occasions.

Emergency Services: Telecommunications

Fiona Mactaggart: To ask the Secretary of State for Health 
	(1)  when he expects the bandwidth for emergency service communications to be finalised; and what the reasons are for the time taken in determining, costing and allocating spectrum for emergency and public safety communications;
	(2)  when the public safety extension band (PSEB) manager will  (a) decide on the allocation of,  (b) submit the full costs schedule for and  (c) provide the licence for the 2x13Mhz spectrum from the PSEB for the Government's chosen provider of emergency and public safety communications airwave solutions.

Ben Bradshaw: This is a new approach to licensing radio spectrum. New processes are being established. This is a complex matter involving this department, Ofcom and others. An offer has been made in principle. The detailed contract and licensing documentation will be completed as soon as possible.

Health and Social Care Act 2003

David Amess: To ask the Secretary of State for Health if he will make a statement on the operation of the Health and Social Care (Community Health and Standards) Act 2003; what amendments have been made to this Act since receiving Royal Assent; and what amendments are planned during the next 12 months.

Ivan Lewis: The key elements of the Health and Social Care (Community Health and Standards) Act 2003 were as follows. The Act made provision for the creation of national health service foundation trusts (FTs), accountable to local communities rather than the Secretary of State; placed a duty on NHS bodies to monitor and improve the quality of healthcare that they provide; gave the Secretary of State power to publish standards in relation to healthcare; created a Commission for Healthcare Audit and Inspection (usually referred to as the Healthcare Commission (HCC)) and a Commission for Social Care Inspection; and made new provisions in relation to primary dental services.
	There are now 103 NHS FTs in place. NHS FTs have demonstrated their ability to establish strong finances and deliver high quality services; the Healthcare Commission's Annual Healthcheck for 2006-07 showed that FTs are delivering better care and improved finances compared to non-FTs.
	The Commission for Healthcare Audit and Inspection, or HCC, reports directly to Parliament on the state of healthcare in England, and on the quality of NHS and independent healthcare, and its value for money. The assessment of individual providers of NHS healthcare takes into account the standards for healthcare published by Secretary of State. By bringing together the expertise of previous health inspection bodies, the HCC is helping to reduce the fragmentation of inspection, easing the burdens on front-line staff.
	Similarly, the Commission for Social Care Inspection (CSCI) is an independent body, which provides a comprehensive picture of the quality of social care services and the performance of local authorities in meeting social care needs in their areas. It gives a star rating to councils annually and, from 2008, a quality rating to care services. The CSCI regulates, inspects and reviews all adult social care services in the public, private and voluntary sectors in England. It does so on the basis of regulations and standards issued by the Secretary of State. It makes an annual report to Parliament on the state of social care that gives a comprehensive overview of the social care sector in England.
	The following amendments were made to this Act following the granting of Royal Assent on 20 November 2003:
	Section (s) 7 (prior to its repeal)s.7(5) amended by Health Act 2006, s.80, Sch.8, para.54;
	s.25 (prior to its repeal)s.25(3A) inserted by Health Act 2006, s.74(6);
	s.28 (prior to its repeal)s.28(3A) inserted by Health Act 2006, s.74(7);
	s.33s.33(2) amended by National Health Service (Consequential Provisions) Act 2006, s.2, Sch.1, para.236;
	s.45s.45(3) amended by National Health Service (Consequential Provisions) Act 2006, s.2, Sch.1, para.241;
	s.50s.50(4) substituted and s.50(4A) inserted by Health Act 2006, s.15(2);
	s.51s.51(4)(a) amended by Health Act 2006, s.15(3);
	s.52s.52(3)(5) substituted and s.52(5A) inserted by Health Act 2006, s.15(4), (5);
	s.54s.54(2) amended by Health Act 2006, s.15(6);
	s.60s.60(5)(1A) inserted by Public Audit (Wales) Act 2004, s.66, Sch.2, para.58;
	s.69AInserted by Public Audit (Wales) Act 2004, s.66, Sch.2, para.59;
	s.76s.76(2)(d) amended by Education and Inspections Act 2006, s.157, Sch.14, para.83(a) - s.76(2)(f), (g) partially repealed by Education and Inspections Act 2006, s.157, s.184, Sch.14, para.83(b), Sch.18, Part 5;
	s.79s.79(2) substituted by Education and Inspections Act 2006, s.157, Sch.14, para.85(2)s.79(2) amended and s.79(2)(a)-(b) inserted by Children Act 2004, s.24(1)s.79(7) repealed by Education and Inspections Act 2006, s.157, s.184, Sch.14, para.85(3), Sch.18, Part 5;
	s.81s.81(2) amended by Education and Inspections Act 2006, s.157, Sch.14, para.87s.81(2) amended by Children Act 2004, s.24(2);
	s.96Substituted by Education and Inspections Act 2006, s.157, Sch.14, para.88 (for Transitional and Supplementary Provisions See Children Act 2004, s.30(1));
	s.113s.113(1)(c) amended by National Health Service (Consequential Provisions) Act 2006, s.2, Sch.1, para.242s.113(4)(a) amended and s.113(4)(aa) inserted by Public Services Ombudsman (Wales) Act 2005, s.39(1), Sch.6, para.75;
	s.114s.114(5)(a) amended by Local Government and Public Involvement in Health Act 2007, s.182, Sch.12, para.18s.114(1)(c) amended by National Health Service (Consequential Provisions) Act 2006, s.2, Sch.1, para.243s.114(5)(b) substituted by Public Services Ombudsman (Wales) Act 2005, s.39(1), Sch.6, para.76(b) [s.114(5)(a) partially repealed Public Services Ombudsman (Wales) Act 2005, s.39, Sch.6, para.76(a), Sch.7];
	s.120s.120(1A), (3A), (5) inserted, s.120(2), (4) amended and s.l20(3) substituted by Education and Inspections Act 2006, s.157, Sch.14, para.91;
	s.122s.122(1) amended by National Health Service (Consequential Provisions) Act 2006, s.2, Sch.1, para.244;
	s.124s.124(6) amended by National Health Service (Consequential Provisions) Act 2006, s.2, Sch.1, para.245;
	s.148s.148 amended by Education and Inspections Act 2006, s.157, Sch.14, para.93s.148 amended by National Health Service (Consequential Provisions) Act 2006, s.2, Sch.1, para.246 [Partially repealed by Local Government and Public Involvement in Health Act 2007, s.146, s.241, Sch.9, para.1(2)(v), Sch.18, Part 9] [For Transitional and Supplementary Provisions see Local Government and Public Involvement in Health Act 2007, s.146(4)];
	s.150s.150(7)(a) substituted; s.150(7)(c) and (d) amended by National Health Service (Consequential Provisions) Act 2006, s.2, Sch.1, para.247s.150(7)(d)(ii) substituted by Health Act 2006, s.80, Sch.8, para.55;
	s.153s.153(9) substituted by Health Act 2006, s.73;
	s.155s.155(7) amended by Tribunals, Courts and Enforcement Act 2007, s.62(3), Sch.13, para.152;
	s.157s.157(3)(a) amended by Constitutional Reform Act 2005, s.59(5), Sch.11, para.1(2);
	s.160s.160(4) amended by National Health Service (Consequential Provisions) Act 2006, s.2, Sch.1, para.248;
	s.162s.162(6) amended by National Health Service (Consequential Provisions) Act 2006, s.2, Sch.1, para.249;
	s.165s.165(3)(b)(ii) and (5) amended by National Health Service (Consequential Provisions) Act 2006, s.2, Sch.1, para.250;
	s.168Amended by National Health Service (Consequential Provisions) Act 2006, s.2, Sch.1, para.251;
	s.194Amended by National Health Service (Consequential Provisions) Act 2006, s.2, Sch.1, para.252;
	s.195s.195(2) amended by The National Health Service (Pre-consolidation Amendments) Order 2006 (S.I. 2006/1407, art.2, Sch.1, Part 2, para.14) re: E/W only. s.195(1) repealed by National Health Service (Consequential Provisions) Act 2006, s.6, Sch.4;
	Schedule (Sch). 6paras.3(1)(a)-(c), (11) amended by Health Act 2006, s.80, Sch.8, para.58(2)(a), (b), (4)(a), (b) para.3(2)-(3), (9)-(10), (14)-(15) repealed by Health Act 2006, s.80, Sch.8, para.58(3), Sch.9; and
	Sch 7para.3(1) amended by Health Act 2006, s.80, Sch.8, para.59(2) para.5(2) repealed by Education and Inspections Act 2006, s.157, s.184, Sch.14, para.94, Sch.18, Part 5 para.3(2), (6)-(8) repealed by Health Act 2006, s.80, Sch.8, para.59(3), Sch.9.
	The Health and Social Care Bill will, subject to parliamentary consent, merge the Commission for Healthcare Audit and Inspection, the CSCI and the Mental Health Act Commission into the Care Quality Commission. The Bill will also replace the 'duty of quality' by a duty on primary care trusts to seek continuous improvement.

Health Services

Andrew Lansley: To ask the Secretary of State for Health 
	(1)  with reference to page 10 of the NHS Next Stage Review Final Report, how much additional funding his Department plans to allocate to support the introduction of integrated fit for work services  (a) in 2008-09 and  (b) in 2009-10; and how many additional staff he estimates will be required for these services to be fully implemented;
	(2)  what central funding his Department plans to provide in support of Fit for Work services, as referred to on page 38 of High Quality Care for All, Cm 7432, whether he plans to pilot Fit for Work services; whether Fit for Work services will be designed on a  (a) national and  (b) local basis; and if he will make a statement.

Ivan Lewis: A cross-Government group is now looking at different models for piloting a new 'Fit for Work' service for people in the early stages of sickness absence, to test out whether this can help people back to appropriate work faster.
	Detailed economic modelling is being undertaken to determine the optimum number of pilots and models of service delivery for piloting, including the costs, workforce requirements and where services should be delivered. Costs and staff mix of any further implementation will depend on the outcome and evaluation of the pilots, expected to begin next year.

Health Services: Elderly

Andrew Smith: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what account he takes of  (a) trends in the age profile of the population and  (b) the requirements of the ageing population in establishing priorities for medical research (i) in and (ii) funded by his Department; and if he will make a statement.

Dawn Primarolo: The Government's health research strategy Best Research for Best Health explicitly recognises the impact demographic and other changes have on the need for research that provides new evidence and knowledge.
	The Department funds the Personal Social Services Research Unit at the London School of Economics. Work on the heath and social care costs of the changing age profile of the population has for some years been a central part of the Unit's remit.
	The Department, with other Government departments, also funds the English Longitudinal Survey of Ageing (ELSA). ELSA collects comprehensive and detailed data on the changing needs and experiences of the country's ageing population, including assessments of mental and physical functioning. These data can play a key part in helping to identify and prioritise future medical research.
	The Department is working actively with other research commissioners in the UK Ageing Research Funders' Forum to map existing research relevant to ageing. By identifying the gaps in current research activity, this process will help to establish priorities for new research in medical and other fields.

Health Services: North Yorkshire

Anne McIntosh: To ask the Secretary of State for Health 
	(1)  what the annual management costs of each primary care trust in North Yorkshire were in each of the last three years for which figures are available;
	(2)  what the projected management costs of the York and North Yorkshire Primary Care Trust are for  (a) 2008-09,  (b) 2009-10 and  (c) 2010-11.

Ann Keen: Information on the annual management costs of each primary care trust (PCT) in North Yorkshire for 2004-05, 2005-06 and 2006-07 is shown in the following table.
	
		
			  000 
			   Managers costs 
			  Organisation name  2004-05  2005-06  2006-07 
			 Selby and York PCT 4,725 3,940  
			 Hambleton and Richmondshire PCT 2,323 2,300  
			 Craven, Harrogate and Rural District PCT 3,249 3,694  
			 Scarborough, Whitby and Ryedale PCT 2,285 2,653  
			 North Yorkshire and York PCT   11,709 
			  Notes:  1. 2006-07 is the latest year for which data is held.  2. The North Yorkshire and York PCT was formed in October 2006 following a merger of the Selby and York, Hambleton and Richmondshire, Craven, Harrogate and Rural District, and Scarborough, Whitby and Ryedale PCTs.  Source:  Audited PCT summarisation schedules 2004-05 to 2006-07. 
		
	
	Data on the projected management costs of the North Yorkshire and York PCT is not held centrally.

Herbal Medicine

Linda Riordan: To ask the Secretary of State for Health 
	(1)  what estimate he has made of the costs per product of conducting tests to demonstrate compliance with the key provisions of European Medicines Evaluation Agency guidance in relation to applications for registration under the Traditional Herbal Medicinal Products Directive;
	(2)  what estimate he has made of the number of specialist  (a) retailers,  (b) manufacturers and  (c) distributors of herbal remedies who have ceased trading or intend to cease trading as a result of the impact of the Traditional Herbal Medicinal Products Directive.

Dawn Primarolo: The guidelines on the quality of herbal medicinal products prepared by the European Medicines Agency largely reflect good practice identified by the herbal industry. In its regulatory impact assessment of the traditional herbal registration (THR) scheme the Medicines and Healthcare products Regulatory Agency (MHRA) estimated that typically the costs of registering a product under the scheme could be several tens of thousand pounds but that the figure would vary widely according to specific circumstances, not least depending on whether companies already had systematic quality control systems in place. This assessment has not changed. The MHRA would expect some rationalisation in the manufacturing of herbal medicines reflecting the fact that to carry out this activity to systematic standards within a regulated environment requires specialist expertise. However, there is no basis on which to make specific estimates and feedback to the MHRA from individual companies suggest that many are still developing their plans. So far 14 companies have submitted applications to register one or more product in the United Kingdom under the THR scheme and we therefore anticipate that there will be a competitive market.

Herbal Medicine

Mark Todd: To ask the Secretary of State for Health 
	(1)  what herbal products are available on the market under the provisions of section 12 (2) of the Medicines Act 1968; and for which of those products an application has been received by the Medicines and Healthcare Products Regulatory Agency for registration under the provisions of the Traditional Herbal Medicinal Products Directive;
	(2)  when  (a) Ministers from his Department and  (b) officials from the Medicines and Healthcare Products Regulatory Agency last met representatives of the European Commission to discuss the impact of the Traditional Herbal Medicinal Products Directive on specialist manufacturers, retailers and consumers of herbal remedies; and what the outcomes were of those meetings.

Dawn Primarolo: Companies are not required to notify the Medicines and Healthcare products Regulatory Agency (MHRA) of products marketed under section 12(2) of the Medicines Act 1968. The information requested is not therefore available.
	Ministers and officials of the MHRA have not met representatives of the European Commission to hold specific discussions on the impact of the Directive on traditional herbal medicinal products. However, the MHRA has had a number of opportunities, for example through sharing a platform at conferences, to update Commission officials on the agency's early experience of the expending number of companies submitting applications under the traditional herbal registration scheme. The MHRA also submitted evidence in 2007 to the Commission's review of Directive 2004/24/EC.

Mental Health Services: Leeds Prison

John Battle: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what arrangements are being made to provide therapeutic services for prisoners with mental health problems in Leeds prison; and if he will make a statement.

Ivan Lewis: Psychological therapies are commissioned by primary care trusts (PCTs). When commissioning these services for prisoners, PCTs will assess the needs of their population and as with all other health provision, consideration will be given as to how services will be delivered to address these needs. This will be determined locally as part of a PCTs commissioning responsibility.

Mental Health Services: Young Offenders

Madeleine Moon: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what estimate he has made of the average time between initial assessment by a psychiatrist at  (a) Ashfield and  (b) Huntercombe young offender institution and transfer to a medium secure hospital for young people funded by a primary care trust.

Ivan Lewis: This information is not held centrally.
	The Procedure for the Transfer of Prisoners to and from Hospital under Sections 47 and 48 of the Mental Health Act 1983 was published in December 2007 with contributions from the Department, HM Prison Service and National Commissioning Group. The National Commissioning Group are responsible for commissioning a range of specialist services including the national in-patient Secure Forensic Mental Health Service for Young People, which oversees in-patient treatment and referrals to seven specialist units for under 18s in England.
	The Procedure for the Transfer of Prisoners to and from Hospital under Sections 47 and 48 of the Mental Health Act 1983 aims to help colleagues to work together more effectively to secure and sustain significant improvements in any unacceptable delays transferring patients from custodial care to hospital care and includes a specific section on young people. The procedure states that a child with an acute need for a mental health secure bed should be moved within seven days.

Mentally Ill: Carers

John Battle: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what his latest estimate is of the number of carers caring for family members with mental health needs.

Ivan Lewis: No such estimate has been made. However, the 2001 census was the first time information on the numbers of carers was available on the basis of a detailed count. The 2001 census indicates that there are some six million people providing unpaid care in the United Kingdom. Some of these cared for people will have mental health issues. However, this figure does not necessarily reflect the number of individuals being cared for, as there is not a one to one ratio of carers to care-recipients.
	The contribution carers make is recognised in law and the policies of central and local government.

Methadone

Graham Brady: To ask the Secretary of State for Health if he will take steps to ensure that users of methadone who receive the drug on prescription are made aware of the risks associated with allowing children in their care access to the drug.

Dawn Primarolo: In September 2007 the Department, in collaboration with the National Treatment Agency for substance misuse (NTA) published guidelines for the clinical management of drug treatment services, Drug Misuse and Dependence: UK Guidelines on Clinical Management.
	The guidelines note that patients prescribed methadone
	must be made fully aware of the risks of their medication and if the importance of protecting children from accidental ingestion. Prescribing arrangements should also aim to reduce risks to children.
	The guideline goes on to note that during assessment clinicians should inform patients of the
	risks to children of ingesting prescribed medication and the importance of safe storage must be emphasised at the first appointment and repeatedly thereafter. Assessment of compliance with these safety measures should form part of the decision-making concerning dispensing and supervision arrangements
	of methadone prescribing.
	In January 2007, the National Institute for Health and Clinical Excellence published the Technology Appraisal Methadone and buprenorphine for managing opioid dependence, which recommended the use of both methadone and buprenorphine for the treatment of opioid dependence.
	This Appraisal notes the risks that the use of methadone (or buprenorphine) has for non-drug users, especially children who may be at risk of accidental ingestion, and that
	the responsible clinician, in consultation with the person, should estimate the risks and benefits of prescribing methadone or buprenorphine, taking account of the person's lifestyle and family situation (for example, whether they are considered chaotic and might put children and other opioid-na?ve individuals living with them at risk).
	Local clinical governance protocols for drug treatment would normally require recording of any serious incidents concerning the 'misuse' of prescribed methadone so that appropriate action can be taken to ensure that any risk or harm is minimised and is not repeated.
	Earlier this year the NTA launched a consultation on clinical governance in drug treatment, with the aim of publishing guidance later this year. This will help commissioners and service providers shape the local implementation of clinical governance systems in this important area.

Obesity: Health Services

Andrew Lansley: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what new resources he will provide to those areas worst affected by  (a) obesity-related and  (b) alcohol-related ill health, as referred to on page 37 of his Department's document High Quality Care for All, Cm 7432; whether these resources will be provided on a one-off or recurrent basis; whether the resources will be provided to primary care trusts on a conditional basis; and if he will make a statement.

Dawn Primarolo: As part of the 372 million allocated to the delivery of Healthy Weight, Healthy Lives: A Cross-Government Strategy for England, 65.9 million has been put into primary care trust (PCT) allocations for 2008-09. PCT allocations for 2009-10 and 2010-11 will be set later this year.
	The Health Inequalities: Progress and Next Steps document published in June 2008 recognised the significance of obesity as one of the most important long-term challenges facing the nation's health and that obesity and its risks are not experienced equally across society. Within the document, the Government announced that it would test a full service model of local programme and services, to both prevent and tackle child and adult overweight and obesity in areas with the highest rates of child and adult obesity. Levels of investment will depend on the outcome of this piloting as well as subsequent implementation decisions by the NHS within overall PCT allocations.
	Lord Darzi's review, High Quality Care For All recognises the role that the full service model can play as an exemplar in supporting preventative healthcare.
	The Health Inequalities: Progress and Next Steps document also referred to the higher levels of alcohol related mortality and hospital admissions within disadvantaged communities. The document committed to establishing a new National Support Team for Alcohol, which will provide in-depth analysis and direct support to Primary Care Trusts to turn around local performance in the areas with the highest rates of alcohol related hospital admissions. The first five to 10 areas covered in 2008-2009 will be able to bid for additional funding over each of the next three years to support local improvements. The total investment over the next three years is subject to finalising PCT allocations for 2009-10 and 2010-11, which will be set later this year.

Primary Care Trusts: Equality

Ian Gibson: To ask the Secretary of State for Health 
	(1)  which primary care trusts have completed a local equality impact assessment; and whether such assessments are collated centrally;
	(2)  what requirements there are for primary care trusts to conduct local equality impact assessments; and what requirements there are for such assessments to cover cancer.

Ivan Lewis: All primary care trusts (PCTs) have a duty to undertake and publish Equality Impact Assessments (EqIAs). These are not centrally collected by the Department. However, the Healthcare Commission has conducted audits of national health service trusts to look at whether trusts have published the required information. Each PCT is required under the equality legislation to equality impact assess their functions, policies, strategies and procedures. The Healthcare Commission when inspecting PCTs will assess the quality of the EqIA which will go towards their annual rating.
	The 'Cancer Reform Strategy' was published in December 2007 (copies of which have already been placed in the Library) and has an equality impact assessment which highlights the strategic equality issues regarding cancer which are there to inform PCTs of the issues they should take in due regard when commissioning their own cancer services.

Sexually Transmitted Diseases: Hertfordshire

Anne Main: To ask the Secretary of State for Health how many sexually transmitted infections were diagnosed at  (a) Waverley Sexual Health Clinic, St. Albans and  (b) in all genito-urinary medicine clinics in Hertfordshire in each of the last five years.

Dawn Primarolo: Information on the number of diagnoses of sexually transmitted infections (STIs) in genito-urinary medicine clinics (GUM) is currently only available at strategic health authority (SHA) level. The East of England SHA includes Hertfordshire.
	The total number of new and other STIs diagnosed in the East of England SHA in the last five years are given in the table.
	
		
			   2003  2004  2005  2006  2007 
			 Total new STI diagnoses(1) 28,419 29,878 29,858 30,190 32,758 
			 Total other STL diagnoses(2) 16,492 18,018 19,865 20,966 21,405 
			 (1) New STIs include chlamydial infection (uncomplicated and complicated), gonorrhoea (uncomplicated and complicated), infectious syphilis, genital herpes simplex (first attack), genital warts (first attack), new HIV diagnosis, non-specific genital infection (uncomplicated and complicated), chancroid/lymphogranuloma venerum (LGV)/donovanosis, Molluscum contagiosum, trichomoniasis, scabies and Pediculus pubis. (2) Other STIs include early latent, congenital and other acquired syphilis, recurrent genital, herpes simplex, recurrent and re-registered genital warts, subsequent HIV presentations (including AIDS), ophthalmia neonatorum (chamydial or gonococcal) and epidemiological treatment of suspected STls (syphilis, chlamydia, gonorrhoea, non-specific genital infection).  Notes: 1. There are 22 GUM clinics in the East of England SHA. 2. There are two GUM clinics in East and North Hertfordshire PCT and two GUM clinics in West Hertfordshire. 3. The data available from the KC60 statutory returns are for diagnoses made in GUM clinics only. Diagnoses made in other clinical settings, such as General Practice, are not recorded in the KC60 dataset. 4. The data available from the KC60 statutory returns are the number of diagnoses made, not the number of patients diagnosed. 5. The information provided has been adjusted for missing clinic data.  Source: Health Protection Agency, KC60 returns

Smoking

Matthew Taylor: To ask the Secretary of State for Health how many fines have been issued for smoking in a public place in  (a) Cornwall,  (b) each constituency in Cornwall,  (c) the South West region and  (d) England.

Dawn Primarolo: This information is not available in the requested form.
	The latest data on compliance with Smokefree legislation is published regularly by the Department at a regional and national level on the Smokefree England website at
	www.smokefreeengland.co.uk.

Smoking: Mental Health Services

Lynne Jones: To ask the Secretary of State for Health 
	(1)  what representations he has received on extending the exemption from the ban on smoking in public places granted to mental health in-patient units; and if he will make a statement;
	(2)  what assessment he has made of the variations in policy on the operation of the ban on smoking in public places in mental health in-patient units;
	(3)  what assessment he has made of the advice given on giving up smoking to patients with a mental health problem by  (a) GPs and  (b) clinicians in secondary care;
	(4)  what assessment he has made of whether there are beneficial effects from smoking on coping with symptoms of mental distress.

Ivan Lewis: A small number of representations have been made in recent weeks from a small minority of establishments who have had difficulties meeting the deadline; additional help has been available to them over the course of the last year and support and advice is still being provided to make sure that they operate within the requirements of the law; the vast majority of mental health units have not encountered difficulties and indeed are benefiting from an end to the smoking den culture in mental health establishments.
	The Government commissioned the Tobacco Control Collaborating Centre (TCCC) to provide support to mental health service providers in the lead up to the implementation of the smokefree legislation in residential mental health units on 1 July 2008. Over the past year the TCCC wrote to all foundation trusts, national health service trusts and independent providers asking about their smokefree policies and inviting individual trusts to request additional support, such as visits. The TCCC has also worked with regional stop smoking leads to organise local workshops to address implementation issues. This initial contact was followed up by sending mental health providers smokefree resources, accompanied by a further offer of support to trusts on an individual basis. To date 24 mental health service providers have been visited.
	Due to the one year gap between wider implementation of smokefree legislation and implementation in mental health units it is too early for comparisons to be made.
	Currently, the Department has made no assessment of advice given on giving up smoking to patients with a mental health problem by either general practitioners or clinicians in secondary care and nor has an assessment been made of the beneficial effects of smoking on coping with symptoms of mental distress. However, the Government are committed to review the impact of the smokefree law in its entirety within three years of implementation.

Strokes

Tim Farron: To ask the Secretary of State for Health how many  (a) heart attacks and  (b) strokes were recorded in Westmoorland and Lonsdale in each month of (i) 2007 and (ii) 2008.

Ann Keen: This information is not collected in the format requested. However, information for the University Hospitals of Morecambe Bay National Health Service Trust for 2006-07 is shown in the following table.
	
		
			  Number of admissions for primary diagnoses of heart attacks and strokes for the University Hospitals of Morecambe Bay NHS Trust for 2006-07. 
			  Primary diagnosis  Number of admissions 
			 Stroke 609 
			 Heart Attack 714 
			  Notes: 1. Data is only available for the year 2006-07 and cannot be broken down by month. 2. The information can only be collected at trust level. The University of Morecambe Bay NHS Trust is the trust which closely corresponds to the Westmorland and Lonsdale area. 3. Data cannot be provided for the number of heart attacks and strokes recorded but are provided as the number of admissions to hospital with a primary diagnosis of a  (a) stroke and  (b) heart attack. 4. Finished admission episodesA finished admission episode is the first period of in-patient care under one consultant within one healthcare provider. Please note that admissions do not represent the number of in-patients, as a person may have more than one admission within the year. 5. Data QualityHES are compiled from data sent by over 300 NHS trusts and primary care trusts (PCTs) in England. Data is also received from a number of independent sector organisations for activity commissioned by the English NHS. The NHS Information Centre for health and social care liaises closely with these organisations to encourage submission of complete and valid data and seeks to minimise inaccuracies and the effect of missing and invalid data via HES processes. While this brings about improvement over time, some shortcomings remain. 6. Assessing growth through timeHES figures are available from 1989-90 onwards. During the years that these records have been collected there have been ongoing improvements in quality and coverage. These improvements in information submitted by the NHS have been particularly marked in the earlier years and need to be accounted for when analysing time series. Some of the increase in figures for later years (particularly 2006-07 onwards) may be due to the improvement in the coverage of independent sector activity. Changes in NHS practice also need to be accounted for when analysing time series. For example, a number of procedures may now be undertaken in outpatient settings and may no longer be accounted in the HES data. This may account for any reductions in activity over time. 7. Diagnosis (primary diagnosis)The primary diagnosis is the first of up to 14 (seven prior to 2002-03) diagnosis fields in the HES data set and provides the main reason why the patient was in hospital. 8. Ungrossed DataFigures have not been adjusted for shortfalls in data (i.e. the data are ungrossed).  Source:  Hospital Episode Statistics (HES), the NHS Information Centre for health and social care.

1 Carlton Gardens

Bob Neill: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs 
	(1)  pursuant to the answer to the hon. Member for Brentwood and Ongar of 15 May 2008,  Official Report, column 1774W, on departmental official residences, who owns the freehold to 1 Carlton Gardens; and what the current duration is of the leasehold;
	(2)  what the timetable is for the negotiations with the Crown Estate for the future of the lease on 1 Carlton Gardens.

Meg Munn: The freehold for 1 Carlton Gardens is held by 'The Queen's Most Excellent Majesty in right of Her Crown, care of the Crown Estate Commissioners'. The lease has expired and is the subject of ongoing negotiations.

Departmental Planning Permission

Eric Pickles: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs pursuant to the answer to the right hon. Member for Horsham of 9 July 2008,  Official Report, column 1657W, on departmental planning permission, if he will outline the nature of the alterations to the third floor of the Old Admiralty Building; and who the current residents of that floor are.

Meg Munn: Alterations were made to the third floor of the Old Admiralty Building to provide open plan office space for Foreign and Commonwealth Office staff.

Iran: Guided Weapons

Jamie Reed: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs what discussions he has had with middle eastern governments on the testing of long range Iranian missiles.

Kim Howells: The Government have not held any discussions specifically about the Iranian missile tests with middle eastern governments. However, we have a regular and ongoing dialogue with them at political and official level that includes how to respond to the threat to regional security posed by Iran and that will include developments such as this. We have made clear publicly that the tests only serve to reinforce international concerns about Iranian intentions.

Iran: Guided Weapons

Jamie Reed: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs what communications he has had with the Iranian government on the testing of its long range missiles.

Kim Howells: We have not discussed the recent missile tests with the Iranian government, although we have made clear publicly that we feel the tests were an unwelcome move which can only serve to reinforce international concerns about Iranian intentions.

Iran: Guided Weapons

Jamie Reed: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs what discussions he has had with his  (a) Israeli,  (b) Russian and  (c) American counterparts on the testing of long range Iranian missiles.

Kim Howells: The Government have not held any discussions specifically about the Iranian missile tests with Israel, Russia or the US. However, we have a regular and ongoing dialogue with them at political and official level that includes how to respond to the threat to regional security posed by Iran and that will include developments such as this. We have made clear publicly that the tests only serve to reinforce international concerns about Iranian intentions.

Middle East: Weapons

Mike Hancock: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs what  (a) diplomatic and  (b) practical steps his Department is taking to support the establishment of a verifiable Middle East Zone free of weapons of mass destruction and associated delivery systems; and if he will make a statement.

Kim Howells: We strongly support the principle of establishing a Middle East zone free from weapons of mass destruction. We co-sponsored the resolution on the Middle East adopted at the 1995 non-proliferation treaty review conference and have consistently supported similar resolutions at the First Committee of the UN General Assembly. Our first priority is peace and stability in the region, including a resolution to the Middle East Peace Process. We are working intensively for a comprehensive regional peace settlement, and to ensure that Iran complies with its UN Security Council and International Atomic Energy Agency obligations. This would provide the best possible context in which to work towards a Weapons of Mass Destruction Free Zone in the Middle East.

Nuclear Non-proliferation Treaty

Jim Cousins: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs what plans he has to propose changes to the Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty; and if he will make a statement.

Kim Howells: The nuclear non-proliferation treaty (NPT) has served the international community well. It remains the foundation of international non-proliferation efforts and a key contribution to collective peace and security. The UK does not plan to reopen the NPT for negotiation. But we are committed to a successful NPT review conference in 2010 and will work to promote consensus around key measures to strengthen the treaty's three pillars: zero tolerance of proliferation; a clear forward plan on multilateral nuclear disarmament; and supporting the right to the safe, secure and peaceful use of nuclear energy.

Business: Females

Margaret Moran: To ask the Secretary of State for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform what assessment he has made of the effectiveness of each regional development agency's funding of women's enterprise.

Patrick McFadden: The Department and the regional development agencies are currently carrying out a major project which will evaluate all the Agencies' programmes. Where Agencies have discrete programmes for women's enterprise those will be evaluated separately. The result of the project will be published in the autumn.
	The RDAs are our key partners in promoting enterprise and we are working collaboratively with them in the roll out of the strong package of measures on women's enterprise announced recently as part of the Government's Enterprise Strategy. Those measures include provision for: 12.5 million of Government capital through a women's investment fund; women's business centre pilots; enhanced mentoring support; a new national enterprise centre of expertise; a media campaign; and activity aimed at opening up procurement opportunities to women-owned businesses. More information on the strategy is available at:
	www.berr.gov.uk/enterprisestrategy

Departmental Pay

John Redwood: To ask the Secretary of State for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform what proportion of staff of his Department and its agencies did not receive the maximum bonus possible under a bonus scheme applying to them since his Department was established.

Gareth Thomas: The Department for Business Enterprise and Regulatory Reform awards non-consolidated special bonuses throughout the year to staff to recognise performance in particularly demanding tasks or situations. There is no maximum limit to the size of bonus that can be awarded but bonus costs are constrained to an overall cost limit, so it is not possible to say what proportion of staff did not receive the maximum bonus possible.
	The agencies of BERR are Companies House and the Insolvency Service. Information on their bonus schemes are an operational matter for the chief executives of BERR's agencies and I have asked them to reply to the hon. Member direct. A copy of their replies will be placed in the Libraries of the House.
	 Letter from Gareth Jones, dated 22 July 2008:
	I am responding on behalf of Companies House to your recently tabled Parliamentary Question to the Secretary of State for Business Enterprise and Regulatory Reform.
	Companies House awards special non-consolidated bonuses to staff throughout the year for exceptional performance. It also has a corporate bonus scheme linked to performance against a range of targets. There is no limit to the special bonuses except the budget for the scheme so no member of staff received the maximum bonus possible. On the corporate scheme, again, no member of staff received 100% of the maximum bonus possible.
	 Letter from Stephen Speed, dated 22 July 2008:
	The Secretary of State for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform has asked me to reply to you directly in respect of your question (2007/3387) asking how many of The Insolvency Service's staff did not receive the maximum bonus possible under a bonus scheme applying to them since his Department was established.
	The Insolvency Service special bonus scheme does not have a maximum value for any one particular bonus payment. The scheme as a whole is subject to an annual cost of no more than 0.4% of its annual pay bill.

Electricity: Meters

Mark Lazarowicz: To ask the Secretary of State for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform how many electricity consumers with dynamically teleswitched meters there were in Scotland  (a) in 2005 and  (b) on the most recent date for which figures are available; and how many consumers who now have such meters are no longer supplied by their previous electricity supplier.

Malcolm Wicks: The Office of Gas and Electricity Markets (Ofgem) has some data about dynamically teleswitched meter customers in Scotland. In September 2003, there were 228,000 dynamically teleswitched meter customers. Ofgem does not have data for 2005, but that number had fallen to 176,000 by July 2008. Data on how many dynamically teleswitched meter customers have switched to another supplier is not available.

Industrial Disputes

John Battle: To ask the Secretary of State for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform how many working days were lost to industrial action in  (a) Leeds Metropolitan District and  (b) Yorkshire and Humberside in each year since 1997.

Patrick McFadden: Data on days lost to industrial action are collected by the Office for National Statistics only at Government Office Region level. Therefore information on days lost relating to the Leeds Metropolitan District is outside of the scope of data collected. The available data for days lost to industrial action in the Government Office region of Yorkshire and Humberside is shown in the following table.
	
		
			   Working days lost 
			 1997 13,768 
			 1998 2,154 
			 1999 21,753 
			 2000 8,008 
			 2001 49,425 
			 2002 91,175 
			 2003 16,921 
			 2004 80,081 
			 2005 8,944 
			 2006 51,877 
			 2007 76,189

Renewable Energy

Gregory Barker: To ask the Secretary of State for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform what steps his Department is taking to take account of affordability in developing its renewable energy strategy does not make costs for domestic or business users unaffordable.

Malcolm Wicks: We are consulting this summer on how to meet the UK's share of the 2020 renewable energy target in the most cost-effective way.

Severn Barrage: Railways

Adam Price: To ask the Secretary of State for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform what consideration the Government has given to the feasibility of including a new railway line in the Severn barrage project.

Malcolm Wicks: We published the terms of reference for the Severn Tidal Power Feasibility Study in January. The terms of reference for the study reflect the Government view that there is not currently a strategic case to justify new transport links between Wales and south-west of England. The evidence is based primarily on the Eddington Review which is being responded to through the Government's Towards a Sustainable Transport Systemboth of these documents are available on the Department for Transport's website at
	www.dft.gov.uk.
	We expect to be consulting on the scope of the strategic environmental assessment (SEA) for a tidal power project in the Severn estuary later in the year and do not at this stage envisage including new transport links within the scope. That is not to say a new transport link could not be considered at a later stagebut such a development may require further assessments of its environmental impacts at that time.
	The Department for Transport have commissioned further work from the Highways Agency and Network Rail on engineering issues and longer term transport requirements across the Severn estuary. The results of these high level assessments will be available in the autumn.

Carbon Emissions

Eric Pickles: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government pursuant to the Answer to the hon. Member for Welwyn Hatfield of 7 July 2008,  Official Report, column 1347W, on carbon emissions, what the differences are between HM Treasury's definition of zero carbon for stamp duty relief and that in the Level 6 Code for Sustainable Homes.

Iain Wright: There are no differences between the definition of zero carbon used by HM Treasury for the purposes of stamp duty relief and that used for the Code for Sustainable Homes. The Government have committed to keeping the definition under review and this will be the subject of a forthcoming consultation exercise.

Construction: Materials

Andrew Stunell: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what estimate she has made of the percentage of the construction products market represented by  (a) recycled and  (b) re-used materials, expressed in (i) cash terms and (ii) mass, in each year since 2004.

Iain Wright: The Department's Report Monitoring the Sustainability of Buildings, published in 2007 contained data about the value and mass of recycled and reusable materials used as of November 2004 only.
	This can be viewed on the Department's website via the link:
	http://www.communities.gov.uk/documents/planningandbuilding/pdf/381414.pdf
	Figures for later years are not currently available, but further data is currently being compiled for the next report on this subject which will be published in 2009.

Departmental Overtime

Mark Hoban: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how many hours of overtime were worked by staff in each pay grade in her Department in each of the last 12 months.

Parmjit Dhanda: The following table shows how many hours overtime was claimed by staff in each pay grade in the Communities and Local Government Headquarters in each of the last 12 months. Data from our Agencies and NDPBs is not held centrally.
	
		
			  Hours 
			   2007  2008 
			  Grade  July  August  September  October  November  December  January  February  March  April  May  June 
			 PBEM2 3
			 1 8
			 2 374 295 112 155 387 360 235 134 347 497 224 356 
			 3 909 632 349 399 686 875 661 643 649 749 545 448 
			 4 1,274 1,763 589 823 1,623 861 1,375 630 978 1,332 736 1,213 
			 5 440 455 372 349 415 267 345 419 466 596 443 486 
			 6 433 314 222 179 550 291 350 279 551 352 222 550 
			 7 121 97   14 91  8 28 26 4 44 
			 Total 3,559 3,554 1,644 1,905 3,675 2,747 2,967 2,112 3,021 3,551 2,174 3,097 
		
	
	Please note that the amount of overtime hours claimed and paid in each of the 12 months may not necessarily reflect the work actually carried out in the specified month. This is because employees often submit claims for overtime payment in either the month following the work or later.

Departmental Overtime

Mark Hoban: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what the cost of overtime payments paid to staff in her Department was in each of the last 12 months, broken down by pay grade.

Parmjit Dhanda: The following table shows the cost of overtime payments paid to staff in each pay grade in the Communities and Local Government Headquarters in each of the last 12 months. Data for our Agencies and NDPBs is not held centrally.
	
		
			   
			   2007  2008 
			   July  August  September  October  November  December  January  February  March  April  May  June 
			 PBEM2 68
			 1 129
			 2 6,887 5,426 2,119 3,062 7,379 7,001 4,576 5,114 6,674 10,318 4,373 7,502 
			 3 18,906 13,023 7,739 8,598 14,748 18,698 14,709 14,301 14,016 16,724 11,695 10,014 
			 4 23,211 32,493 11,832 15,707 32,553 16,650 24,777 25,305 17,384 25,798 13,295 22,530 
			 5 10,299 10,361 9,098 8,330 10,656 6,019 8,727 11,735 11,624 15,687 12,767 12,899 
			 6 7,421 5,117 3,894 3,418 9,903 4,685 5,961 8,836 9,624 6,313 4,201 9,679 
			 7 2,667 1,992   265 2,058  149 519 439 128 1,223 
			 Total 69,519 68,411 34,682 39,115 75,504 55,111 58,750 65,439 59,910 75,280 46,459 63,846 
		
	
	Please note that the amount of overtime paid in each of the 12 months may not necessarily reflect the work actually carried out in the specified month. This is because employees often submit claims for overtime payments either the month following the work or later.

Disabled

Mark Harper: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how many and what proportion of staff in  (a) her Department and  (b) the executive agencies for which she is responsible are disabled; and what the average salary in her (i) Department and (ii) executive agencies is of (A) full-time disabled staff, (B) full-time non-disabled staff, (C) part-time disabled staff and (D) part-time non-disabled staff.

Parmjit Dhanda: The average salaries of disabled staff, non-disabled staff and staff for which their disability status is unknown, is given in the following table.
	
		
			   Average salaries (full-time equivalent) ()  Staff numbers (headcount) 
			 isabledfull-time 35,306 88 
			 Disabledpart-time 38,994 11 
			 Non disabledfull-time 38,448 1,289 
			 Non disabledpart-time 38,666 140 
			 Unknown/do not want to disclosefull-time 35,429 411 
			 Unknown/do not want to disclosepart-time 37,791 44 
		
	
	Details of the average salaries of disabled and non-disabled staff in the Department's agencies are not held centrally.

Benefits

Jennifer Willott: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions 
	(1)  how many and what proportion of housing benefit recipients received backdated payments  (a) in total and  (b) for a period covering (i) up to three months, (ii) between three and six months and (iii) between six and 12 months in the most recent period for which figures are available; and if he will make a statement;
	(2)  how many and what proportion of working age council tax benefit recipients received backdated payments  (a) in total and  (b) for a period covering (i) up to three months, (ii) between three and six months and (iii) between six and 12 months in the most recent period for which figures are available; and if he will make a statement.
	(3)  how many and what proportion of pensioner council tax benefit recipients received backdated payments  (a) in total and  (b) for a period covering (i) up to three months, (ii) between three and six months and (iii) between six and 12 months in the most recent period for which figures are available; and if he will make a statement.

James Plaskitt: The information is not available.
	Our ability to provide this breakdown is restricted by the breadth and reliability of the data available to us.
	As part of the Equality Impact Assessment, we have provided an estimate of the proportion of housing benefit and council tax benefit case loads affected by the proposals to reduce the backdating facilities to three months. There are, however, important caveats to these estimates which must be noted.
	A copy of the Equality Impact Assessment has been placed in the Library. It is also available on the Department for Work and Pensions website at:
	http://www.dwp.gov.uk/resourcecentre/PC-HB-CTB-EIA-Apr08.pdf
	Figures on the number of successful backdating claims are derived from the Single Housing Benefit Extract (HBSD-IAD scan). The backdating variable in the Single Housing Benefit Extract was introduced relatively recently in April 2007 and accordingly we have no means of corroborating the data's robustness against historical data. Furthermore, given that the data only goes back six months, we currently have an insufficient pool of evidence to derive reliable figures from the data. These concerns should be allayed with time as the scan data improves.
	Based on the first six months of data available, it is estimated that approximately 0.2 per cent. of new housing benefit and council tax benefit claims would be affected by a reduction in the backdating period to three months. These figures may be subject to revision as more data becomes available.

Employment

James Clappison: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions pursuant to the Answer of 12 May 2008,  Official Report, columns 1299-1301W, on employment, if he will break down the figures in Table D, foreign nationals, into  (a) EU and  (b) non EU citizens.

Stephen Timms: The information requested is given in the following tables.
	The figures for foreign nationals provided in the answer given to the hon. Member on 12 May 2008,  Official Report, columns 1299-1301W, were, as stated in the response, based on 2003 population estimates which were the latest estimates available at the time. On 14 May, ONS released re-weighted data based on 2007 population estimates. The foreign nationals table provided has therefore been revised to reflect the latest population estimates available and to include data on additional quarters now available, namely Q2 1998, Q2 2000 and Q1 2008. The tables for EU and non-EU nationals also use the 2007 population estimates.
	
		
			  Table (D) foreign nationals 
			   (i) Employment rate (percentage)  (ii) WA employment  (iii) 16+ employment 
			 Q2 1997 60.3 940,000 970,000 
			 Q2 1998 60.3 1,040,000 1,060,000 
			 Q2 1999 60.0 990,000 1,020,000 
			 Q2 2000 60.4 1,110,000 1,140,000 
			 Q2 2001 61.6 1,180,000 1,210,000 
			 Q2 2002 62.2 1,260,000 1,300,000 
			 Q2 2003 62.7 1,360,000 1,390,000 
			 Q2 2004 64.8 1,470,000 1,500,000 
			 Q2 2005 63.9 1,570,000 1,600,000 
			 Q1 2006 67.0 1,760,000 1,800,000 
			 Q2 2006 68.0 1,840,000 1,880,000 
			 Q3 2006 69.2 1,910,000 1,960,000 
			 Q4 2006 68.7 1,960,000 2,010,000 
			 Q1 2007 66.9 1,980,000 2,020,000 
			 Q2 2007 67.9 2,100,000 2,140,000 
			 Q3 2007 68.6 2,110,000 2,150,000 
			 Q4 2007 68.3 2,170,000 2,210,000 
			 Q1 2008 69.2 2,250,000 2,290,000 
		
	
	
		
			  Table (D) (a) EU nationals 
			   (i) Employment rate (percentage)  (ii) WA employment  (iii) 16+ employment 
			 Q2 1997 66.7 400,000 420,000 
			 Q2 1998 68.5 450,000 470,000 
			 Q2 1999 69.0 430,000 450,000 
			 Q2 2000 69.0 440,000 460,000 
			 Q2 2001 72.6 470,000 490,000 
			 Q2 2002 72.4 460,000 480,000 
			 Q2 2003 72.4 490,000 520,000 
			 Q2 2004 71.9 560,000 580,000 
			 Q2 2005 73.2 620,000 640,000 
			 Q1 2006 75.2 720,000 740,000 
			 Q2 2006 75.8 710,000 730,000 
			 Q3 2006 77.3 750,000 780,000 
			 Q4 2006 77.2 830,000 860,000 
			 Q1 2007 77.4 900,000 920,000 
			 Q2 2007 77.1 970,000 990,000 
			 Q3 2007 78.4 970,000 990,000 
			 Q4 2007 79.0 1,010,000 1,030,000 
			 Q1 2008 78.9 1,070,000 1,090,000 
		
	
	
		
			  Table (D) (b) non-EU nationals 
			   (i) Employment r ate (percentage)  (ii) WA employment  (iii) 16+  e mployment 
			 Q2 1997 56.2 540,000 550,000 
			 Q2 1998 55.3 590,000 300,000 
			 Q2 1999 54.6 560,000 570,000 
			 Q2 2000 55.9 670,000 580,000 
			 Q2 2001 56.0 710,000 ^30,000 
			 Q2 2002 57.5 800,000 520,000 
			 Q2 2003 58.2 860,000 370,000 
			 Q2 2004 61.1 910,000 J20.000 
			 Q2 2005 59.0 950,000 J60.000 
			 Q1 2006 62.3 1,040,000 060,000 
			 Q2 2006 63.8 1,120,000 140,000 
			 Q3 2006 64.8 1,160,000 180,000 
			 Q4 2006 63.6 1,130,000 150,000 
			 Q1 2007 60.1 1,080,000 100,000 
			 Q2 2007 61.7 1,130,000 150,000 
			 Q3 2007 62.1 1,140,000 160,000 
			 Q4 2007 61.1 1,160,000 180,000 
			 Q1 2008 62.3 1,190,000 200,000 
			  Notes: 1. Figures are rounded to the nearest 10,000. 2. The figures provided in the tables are not seasonally adjusted. This means direct comparisons between different quarters are not possible. 3. In order to provide the more detailed breakdown that is required to answer the question, a country is defined as being in the EU only from the date at which it became a member state. This means that workers from some countries (e.g. Estonia) will be counted as non-EU nationals for some years (in the case of Estonia prior to 2004) and EU nationals for other years. 4. The totals for foreign nationals in Table (D) may not be equal to the sum of the corresponding numbers shown for EU and non-EU nationalsTables (D) (a) and (D) (b) respectivelydue to rounding. 5. As these figures are based on a sample survey they are also subject to sampling variability. 6. It should be noted that the nationality question in the LFS is an undercount because: it excludes those who have not been resident in the UK for six months; it excludes students in halls who do not have a UK resident parent; it excludes people in most other types of communal establishments (e.g. hotels, boarding houses, hostels, mobile home sites, etc); it is grossed to population estimates that only include migrants staying for 12 months or more.  Source: Labour Force Survey (LFS)

Employment Services: Hearing Impaired

Jeremy Corbyn: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what facilities jobcentres offer to deaf people who arrive to make enquiries  (a) with and  (b) without an appointment; and how many front line jobcentre staff have qualifications in British Sign Language.

Stephen Timms: The administration of Jobcentre Plus is a matter for the Chief Executive of Jobcentre Plus, Lesley Strathie. I have asked her to provide my hon. Friend with the information requested.
	 Letter from Lesley Strathie, dated 22 July 2008:
	The Secretary of State has asked Lesley Strathie to reply to your question asking what facilities Jobcentres offer to deaf people who arrive to make enquiries (a) with and (b) without an appointment; and how many front line jobcentre staff have qualifications in British Sign Language. I am replying on behalf of Lesley Strathie as acting Chief Executive of Jobcentre Plus.
	Within Jobcentre Plus we recognise the diverse range of customers we serve and we are fully committed to providing equally accessible and available services to all customers.
	Customers who are hearing impaired can obtain support from Jobcentre Plus in the following ways:
	if a customer is able to use a hearing loop, we provide integrated and portable hearing loop facilities in each Jobcentre;
	where customers prefer to have a qualified British Sign Language (BSL) interpreter present, the Jobcentre will arrange for an external interpreter to be present at the interview. We currently have four contracted providers that provide BSL interpreters nationally, or staff can use local qualified interpreters, lip speakers, or deaf blind interpreters; or
	alternatively, customers can choose to bring friends, relatives or intermediaries to act as interpreting agents for them. If a customer provides their own professional qualified interpreter they can be reimbursed with reasonable costs.
	We do not hold a central national database of staff who are qualified in BSL and this information could only be obtained at disproportionate cost.
	Jobcentre Plus is committed to providing a first class service and ensuring we fully support all our customers.

Job Centres: Closures

Daniel Rogerson: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many job centres have closed in each region in each of the last four years.

Stephen Timms: The administration of Jobcentre Plus is a matter for the chief executive of Jobcentre Plus, Lesley Strathie. I have asked her to provide the hon. Member with the information requested.
	 Letter from Mel Groves, dated 22 July 2008:
	The Secretary of State has asked Lesley Strathie to reply to your question seeking details of how many Jobcentres have closed, in each region, in each of the last four years. I am replying on behalf of Lesley Strathie as acting Chief Executive of Jobcentre Plus.
	Jobcentre Plus was created in April 2002 by the merger of the former Employment Service and Benefits Agency and has continued to refocus and transform the way it delivers its services. It now provides access to a wide range of services by telephone through Benefit Delivery and Contact Centres and provides face to face access for customers through a network of modernised Jobcentres.
	The following table provides details of the customer facing Jobcentre Plus offices which were closed between 2004 and 2007.
	
		
			  Customer facing Jobcentres closed since January 2004 
			  Region  2004  2005  2006  2007 
			 East Midlands 4 2 13 2 
			 East of England 1 12 5 1 
			 London 11 ¦7 24 10 
			 North East 4 7 4 2 
			 North West 14 10 17 8 
			 Scotland 11 14 22 3 
			 South East 14 10 15 5 
			 South West 12 11 8 4 
			 Wales 13 8 23 1 
			 West Midlands 3 7 19 12 
			 Yorkshire and Humber 8 11 7 1

Members: Correspondence

James Clappison: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions when he plans to answer Question 169293, on employment rates, tabled by the hon. Member for Hertsmere on 26 November 2007.

Stephen Timms: I replied to the hon. Member's question 169293 on employment rates today.

National Insurance: Foreign Workers

Peter Bone: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what estimate he has made of the number of national insurance numbers issued to migrant workers in the last 12 months; and if he will make a statement.

Stephen Timms: The most recent data available on national insurance numbers registered to adult foreign nationals is for the financial year 2006-07. Information on these registrations can be found in the report National Insurance Number Allocations to Overseas Nationals Entering the UK 2006-07 which has been placed in the Library and is available online at:
	www.dwp.gov.uk/asd/asd1/niall/niall_report.pdf

Pension Credit

Jennifer Willott: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions 
	(1)  how many and what proportion of recipients of backdated pension credit benefit had incomes below 60 per cent. of median income before housing costs  (a) before and  (b) after receiving backdated pension credit in the most recent period for which figures are available; and if he will make a statement;
	(2)  what assessment the Department has made of the likely effect on pensioner poverty of the Department's proposals to reduce the backdating period for pension credit; and if he will make a statement.

Mike O'Brien: The specific information requested is not available.
	Since the introduction of pension credit the number of pensioners with incomes below 60 per cent. of median income after deducting housing costs, have fallen by 500,000. The proposal to change the length of time allowed for customers to claim pension credit (known as backdating) from 12 to three months is part of a further package of pensions measures that will make claiming benefit entitlements simpler and less intrusive and deliver extra support to low income pensioners. This package includes the introduction of a more automatic claims process for housing benefit and council tax benefit claims made over the phone with pension credit claims, which will benefit around 50,000 pensioners over the comprehensive spending review period.
	Tackling pensioner poverty is a priority. We will continue to strive to ensure that older people are aware of, and take up their entitlements through initiatives such as: sophisticated data matching to identify eligible non-recipients, home visits for vulnerable customers, local and national advertising and media campaigns, a simple and straight-forward claim process and ever closer working with partner organisations.

Pension Service: Telephone Services

Mark Prisk: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what income his Department received from the Pension Service's 0845 number in  (a) 2007-08,  (b) 2006-07 and  (c) 2005-06.

Mike O'Brien: I am told that the information is not available in the form requested.
	Although the DWP, which includes The Pension Service, received a 1.5 million rebate on its telephone charges from British Telecom, in relation to its 0845 services for the period from 1 October 2005 to the 30 November 2007, this rebate was offset against DWP telephony costs. After this date, the rebate arrangements ceased. This change in arrangement does not affect the charge a customer pays for contacting the Department. The charge a customer pays depends on their personal contract.
	No information is available for any earlier period, nor on the amount relating specifically to calls to The Pension Service.

Pensioners: Poverty

Jennifer Willott: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions 
	(1)  what estimate his Department has made of the effect on pensioner poverty if the caseload take-up rate for housing benefit/local housing allowance among pensioners increased to  (a) 100 per cent. and  (b) 90 per cent.; and if he will make a statement;
	(2)  what estimate his Department has made of the effect on pensioner poverty if the expenditure take-up rate for the guarantee element of pension credit increased to  (a) 100 per cent. and  (b) 90 per cent.; and if he will make a statement;
	(3)  what estimate his Department has made of the effect on pensioner poverty if the expenditure take-up rates for the guarantee and savings element of pension credit increased to  (a) 100 per cent. (b) 90 per cent. and  (c) 80 per cent.; and if he will make a statement;
	(4)  what estimate his Department has made of the effect on pensioner poverty if the caseload take-up rate for the savings element of pension credit increased to  (a) 100 per cent.  (b) 90 per cent. and  (c) 80 per cent.; and if he will make a statement;
	(5)  what estimate his Department has made of the likely effect on levels of pensioner poverty if the caseload take-up rate for housing benefits or local housing allowance among pensioners were increased to 100 per cent.; and if he will make a statement;
	(6)  what estimate his Department has made of the likely effect on levels of pensioner poverty if the expenditure take-up rate for council tax benefits amongst pensioners were increased to  (a) 100 per cent.,  (b) 90 per cent.  (c) 80 per cent. and  (d) 70 per cent.; and if he will make a statement
	(7)  what estimate his Department has made of the likely effect on levels of pensioner poverty if the caseload take-up rate for council tax benefits among pensioners were increased to  (a) 100 per cent.  (b) 90 per cent.  (c) 80 per cent. and  (d) 70 per cent.; and if he will make a statement;
	(8)  what estimate his Department has made of the likely effect on levels of pensioner poverty if the caseload take-up rate for the guarantee and savings element of pension credits were  (a) 100 per cent.  (b) 90 per cent. and  (c) 80 per cent.; and if he will make a statement;
	(9)  what estimate his Department has made of the likely effect on levels of pensioner poverty if the expenditure take-up rate for the savings element of pension credits were increased to  (a) 100 per cent., and  (b) 90 per cent.; and if he will make a statement;
	(10)  what estimate his Department has made of the likely effect on levels of pensioner poverty if the caseload take-up rate for the guarantee element of pension credit were increased to  (a) 100 per cent. and  (b) 90 per cent; and if he will make a statement.

Mike O'Brien: Poverty is a complex and multidimensional issue and, as such, there are many possible measures of poverty.
	It is generally accepted that low income is central to any poverty measurement. Definitions of low income households are set out in the annual national statistics publication households below average income. This reports numbers of individuals in households below or persistently below 50 per cent., 60 per cent. and 70 per cent. of median household income before and after deducting housing costs.
	The information is not available in the format requested. It is not possible to model the impact of less than full take up of individual benefits on the number of individuals in households below thresholds of median household income in a robust way.
	Estimates will depend on which eligible non-recipients take up which benefit and where they are within the income distribution.
	It is estimated that if there were 100 per cent. take up off all income related benefits by everyone in the population entitled to claim them the number of pensioners below 60 per cent. of contemporary median income would fall by around 700,000, after housing costs have been taken into account, based on 2008-09 benefit rates.
	Tackling pensioner poverty remains a priority. We will continue to strive to ensure that older people are aware of, and take up their entitlements through initiatives such as; using sophisticated data matching to identify eligible non-recipients, home visits for vulnerable customers, local and national advertising and media campaigns, a simple and straight-forward claim process and ever closer working with partner organisations. In addition to pension credit we have increased winter fuel payments to 200 for households with someone aged 60-79, and 300 for those with someone aged 80 or over. And we will be making an additional payment for winter 2008-09 of 50 for households with someone aged 60-79 and 100 for those with someone aged 80 or over. Since 1997, we have also introduced free eye-tests, free bus passes for pensioners and free television licences for over 75s.

Pensioners: Poverty

Angus MacNeil: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many and what proportion of pensioners lived below the Government's designated poverty level, broken down by  (a) sex and  (b) age in each year since 1997.

Mike O'Brien: Poverty is a complex and multidimensional issue and, as such, there are many possible measures.
	It is generally accepted that low income is central to any poverty measurement. As no single measure captures all aspects of poverty, the public service agreement Tackle poverty and promote greater independence and wellbeing in later life includes a range of indicators related to low income for pensioners. These are the percentage of pensioners in relative low income (below 50 and 60 per cent. contemporary median household income), and absolute low income (below 60 per cent. of 1998-99 median income uprated in line with prices), measured after housing costs.
	Figures for the number and percentage of pensioners below the 60 per cent. contemporary median household income after housing costs threshold by gender and age are shown in the following tables. Further information is set out in the annual national statistics publication Households Below Average Income which is available in the Library.
	
		
			  Number of pensioners living in households with less than 60 per cent. of contemporary median household income after housing costs, by gender and ageFigures are United Kingdom from 2002-03 onwards. Earlier years are great Britain only 
			   Gender  Age  
			   Male  Female  60-64  65-69  70-74  75-79  80-84  85+  All pensioners 
			  Great Britain  
			 1996-97 0.9 2.0 0.3 0.5 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.3 2.9 
			 1997-98 0.9 2.0 0.3 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.4 0.3 2.9 
			 1998-99 0.9 1.9 0.3 0.5 0.7 0.7 0.4 0.3 2.9 
			 1999-2000 0.9 1.9 0.3 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.3 2.8 
			 2000-01 0.8 1.8 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.3 2.6 
			 2001-02 0.9 1.7 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 2.6 
			  United Kingdom  
			 2002-03 0.9 1.7 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.2 2.5 
			 2003-04 0.7 1.5 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 2.2 
			 2004-05 0.7 1.2 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.2 1.9 
			 2005-06 0.6 1.2 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.2 1.8 
			 2006-07 0.7 1.4 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.2 2.1 
		
	
	
		
			  Percentage of pensioners living in households with less than 60 per cent. of contemporary median household income after housing costs, by gender and ageFigures are United Kingdom from 2002-03 onwards: Earlier years are Great Britain only 
			   Gender  Age  
			   Male  Female  60-64  65-69  70-74  75-79  80-84  85+  All pensioners 
			  Great Britain  
			 1996-97 24 32 21 21 29 36 39 38 29 
			 1997-98 26 31 20 22 30 37 37 38 29 
			 1998-99 26 30 21 21 30 35 37 35 29 
			 1999-2000 24 29 21 22 28 30 39 35 28 
			 2000-01 23 28 21 21 25 31 30 33 26 
			 2001-02 23 27 21 20 27 29 31 31 26 
			  United Kingdom  
			 2002-03 23 25 20 20 24 27 30 29 24 
			 2003-04 18 22 19 18 21 23 24 22 21 
			 2004-05 16 18 18 16 16 19 19 22 18 
			 2005-06 16 18 16 16 16 17 18 22 17 
			 2006-07 17 20 17 16 17 21 21 25 19 
			  Notes 1. Data for Northern Ireland has only been collected since 2002-03, so the information shown is for the United Kingdom from 2002-03 to 2006-07, and for Great Britain for 1996-97 to 2001-02. 2. A pensioner is defined as anyone over state pension age. 3. The income measures used to derive the estimates shown employ the same methodology as the Department for Work and Pensions publication Households Below Average Income (HBAI) series, which uses disposable household income, adjusted (or equivalised) for household size and composition, as an income measure as a proxy for standard of living. 4. The figures are based on OECD equalisation factors. 5. Numbers of pensioners have been rounded to the nearest 100,000, while proportions of pensioners have been rounded to the nearest percentage point. 6. Small year-on-year movements should be treated with caution as these will be affected by sampling error and variability in non-response.

Pensioners: Social Security Benefits

David Evennett: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many applications for council tax benefit there were in each London borough in each year since 1997.

James Plaskitt: The information is not available prior to 2001-02. The available information is in the following table.
	
		
			  New council tax benefit claims received each year by London local authorities 
			  Local authority  2001-02  2002-03  2003-04  2004-05  2005-06  2006-07  2007-08 
			 Barking 6328 7153  4275 5918 6047 5102 
			 Barnet 10686 10261 7368 8501 8775 7235 6595 
			 Bexley 4737 6648 5654 4833 4661 5283 4302 
			 Brent 11547 10123 6061 8842 6785 6050 7866 
			 Bromley 1551 9234 5333 6018 6560 5342 3707 
			 Camden 7561 6864 1461 5367 4534 4983 4320 
			 City of London 162 196 81 159 121 174 149 
			 Croydon 7951 10827 11163 11400 8281 7820 4344 
			 Ealing 13758 15850 14954 12149 8513 3671 7703 
			 Enfield  9610 8859 10402 6483 8022 6496 
			 Greenwich 9418 9826 7675 8129 8006 7109 5275 
			 Hackney 18421 15266 3516 13157 8597 9152 8724 
			 Hammersmith and Fulham 6015 4395 6046 2663 4916 4103 3866 
			 Haringey 19495 18356 8479 5713 5328 5377 5258 
			 Harrow 3975 5620 5254 4976 4739 4704 2309 
			 Havering 5160 5370 5215 4877 4461 4567 4266 
			 Hillingdon 8954 8260 5361 5292 4059 5938 6351 
			 Hounslow  6147 3925 5775 5233 6191 5704 
			 Islington 7162 10015 8477 7902 5123 5165 7867 
			 Kensington and Chelsea 3721 3895 2069 3697 4672 3385 1601 
			 Kingston upon Thames 3778 3273 3624 3458 2904 3531 3131 
			 Lambeth  17003 10802 12377 8545 8378 9186 
			 Lewisham 11076 10634 9049 10591 11269 6570 8316 
			 Merton 6278 5496 4597 4104 5544 4272 4527 
			 Newham  14907 10630 10940 10249 8563 6192 
			 Redbridge 5965 6622 5154 5900 6089 5109 4570 
			 Richmond upon Thames 2187 2426 2918 2740 2736 3013 2851 
			 Southwark 14151 16196 14024 12654 9255 9380 5913 
			 Sutton 4609 4473 2629 3211 3303 3656 3465 
			 Tower Hamlets 9852 14977 10102 8838 8260 8738 6516 
			 Waltham Forest 11593 10169 7445 7527 6505 6872 6494 
			 Wandsworth 5809 8516 6200 6043 4440 9739 4722 
			 Westminster 4885 21681969 2078 
			  Notes: 1. The total number of new council tax benefit claims consists of successful, unsuccessful, defective and withdrawn claims. 2. Where no data exists it was not supplied by the relevant local authority. 3. The Department is currently making arrangements for local authorities to submit their data where they have not previously done so for 2007-08. Consequently, the figures for 2007-8 are subject to change.  Source: Local authority reported performance data

Personal Accounts

Harry Cohen: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions 
	(1)  what estimate he has made of the percentage of final salary which would be provided for a personal account saver for  (a) men,  (b) women and  (c) all people on average earnings throughout their working lives;
	(2)  what estimate he has made of the percentage of final salary from average earnings at which the income from personal account saving would provide an income above the level of the basic state pension.

Mike O'Brien: Personal Accounts and other private pensions are not intended to give an income instead of the basic State Pension. Any income from private pension savingin an occupational defined benefit or defined contribution schemewill be in addition to state pension entitlements.
	A male median earner, who, from age 22 in 2012 to state pension age, works and saves in an occupational defined contribution pension at the minimum level set out under reformfour per cent. from the individual, one per cent tax relief and three per cent. from the employer on banded earnings between around 5,000 and 33,000can expect to receive a gross weekly private pension of around 80 in today's earnings terms (roughly equivalent to the level of the basic state pension), and a total net weekly income of 224. His replacement rate from saving would be 50 per cent., an improvement of around 15 percentage points from saving.
	A female median earner, with the same work and savings history, can expect to receive around 55 gross weekly private pension, and a total net weekly income of 202. Her replacement rate from saving would be 57 per cent., an improvement of around 12 percentage points from saving. Her replacement rate from the state pension system is higher than that of the previous example reflecting the fact that her state pension entitlement will be the same as that for the male median example, but the earnings with which they are compared will be lower.
	A male average earner, again with the same work and savings history, can expect to receive around 72 gross weekly private pension, and a total net weekly income of 216. The replacement rate from saving would be 53 per cent., an improvement of around 14 percentage points from saving.
	 Note:
	These examples assume male median earnings of 24,440, female median earnings of 19,240 and average earnings of 22,360. For all examples, an annual management charge of 0.5 per cent, and phasing over a three year period are assumed. The whole of the pension pot is annuitised using gender-specific RPI-linked annuities for the male and female earners and a male RPI-linked annuity for the average earner. All figures are in 2007-08 earnings terms. The replacement rates shown are higher than the 45 per cent targeted by the Pensions Commission for lifetime median earners as they refer to saving from age 22 rather than from around age 30 as used by the Pensions Commission.

Poverty

James Clappison: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many and what proportion of  (a) 55 to 59 year olds,  (b) 60 to 64 year olds and  (c) 65 to 69 year olds lived in households with below 60 per cent. of median income (i) before and (ii) after deducting household costs in each year since 1997.

Mike O'Brien: This information is given in the following tables.
	
		
			  Table 1: Number and proportion of 55 to 59-year-olds in households below 60 per cent. of median income 
			 Before housing costs  After housing costs 
			  Coverage  Year  Total number of 55 to 59 year olds (million)  Number below 60% of median income (million)  Percentage below 60% of median income  Number below 60% of median income (million)  Percentage below 60% of median income 
			 GB 1997-98 2.9 0.5 16 0.5 18 
			  1998-99 3.0 0.5 16 0.5 18 
			  1999-00 3.1 0.5 15 0.5 17 
			  2000-01 3.1 0.5 16 0.6 18 
			  2001-02 3.3 0.5 16 0.6 18 
			 UK 2002-03 3.7 0.6 15 0.6 17 
			  2003-04 3.9 0.6 16 0.7 18 
			  2004-05 3.8 0.6 15 0.6 16 
			  2005-06 3.9 0.6 15 0.6 17 
			  2006-07 3.9 0.7 17 0.7 18 
			  Source:  Households Below Average Income, DWP 
		
	
	
		
			  Table 1: Number and proportion of  60 to 64 9-year-olds in households below 60 per cent. of median income 
			 Before housing costs  After housing costs 
			  Coverage  Year  Total number of  60 to 64 year olds (million)  Number below 60% of median income (million)  Percentage below 60% of median income  Number below 60% of median income (million)  Percentage below 60% of median income 
			 GB 1997-98 2.7 0.5 19 0.6 22 
			  1998-99 2.7 0.5 19 0.6 21 
			  1999-00 2.8 0.5 19 0.6 22 
			  2000-01 2.8 0.5 18 0.6 21 
			  2001-02 2.8 0.6 21 0.6 22 
			 UK 2002-03 2.9 0.6 19 0.6 21 
			  2003-04 3.0 0.6 19 0.6 20 
			  2004-05 3.0 0.5 18 0.6 19 
			  2005-06 3.1 0.6 18 0.5 18 
			  2006-07 3.2 0.6 18 0.6 18 
			  Source:  Households Below Average Income, DWP 
		
	
	
		
			  Table 1: Number and proportion of  65 to 6 9-year-olds in households below 60 per cent. of median income 
			 Before housing costs  After housing costs 
			  Coverage  Year  Total number of  65 to 6 9 year olds (million)  Number below 60% of median income (million)  Percentage below 60% of median income  Number below 60% of median income (million)  Percentage below 60% of median income 
			 GB 1997-98 2.6 0.5 19 0.6 22 
			  1998-99 2.5 0.5 20 0.5 21 
			  1999-00 2.5 0.5 19 0.6 22 
			  2000-01 2.5 0.5 20 0.5 21 
			  2001-02 2.5 0.4 18 0.5 20 
			 UK 2002-03 2.5 0.5 19 0.5 20 
			  2003-04 2.5 0.5 18 0.4 18 
			  2004-05 2.6 0.4 17 0.4 16 
			  2005-06 2.7 0.5 18 0.4 16 
			  2006-07 2.6 0.5 18 0.4 16 
			  Notes: 1. These statistics are based on Households Below Average Income data. 2. Data for Northern Ireland has only been collected since 2002-03, so the information shown is for the United Kingdom from 2002-03 to 2006-07, and for Great Britain for 1997-98 to 2001-02. 3. Small changes should be treated with caution as these will be affected by sampling error and variability in non-response. 4. The reference period for Household Below Average Income figures is single financial years. 5. The income measures used to derive the estimates shown employ the same methodology as the Department for Work and Pensions publication 'Households Below Average Income' (HBAI) series, which uses disposable household income, adjusted (or equivalised) for household size and composition, as an income measure as a proxy for standard of living. 6. The figures are based on OECD equivalisation factors. 7. Figures have been presented on both a Before Housing Cost and After Housing Cost basis. For Before Housing Cost, housing costs (such as rent, water rates, mortgage interest payments, structural insurance payments and ground rent and service charges) are not deducted from income, while for After Housing Cost they are. 8. The Government's preferred measures of low income for pensioners are based on incomes measured after housing costs. Measuring income on an after housing costs basis is appropriate, as two thirds of pensioners own their property outright and so face lower housing costs to meet from their current income while still deriving value from their home. This is different to the current working age population and to the situation for pensioners in the past. Considering pensioners' incomes compared to others after deducting housing costs allows for more meaningful comparisons of income between working age people and pensioners, and between pensioners over time 9. As part of PSA Delivery Agreement 17 three indicators of low income poverty will be monitored: the percentage of pensioners below 60 per cent. contemporary median income, 50 per cent median income and 60 per cent. of 1998-99 median income uprated in line with prices. 10. Numbers of individuals in each age range have been rounded to the nearest 100,000 individuals, while proportions of individuals in each age range have been rounded to the nearest percentage point.  Source:  Households Below Average Income, DWP

Poverty: Children

Sarah Teather: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many children in each London borough were living in poverty in each of the last 10 years, broken down by ethnicity.

Stephen Timms: The information is not available.
	Our child poverty statistics, published in the Households Below Average Income series, allow a breakdown of child poverty by Government Office Region. The Households Below Average Income Series cannot provide information below the level of Government Office Region.
	Work is currently underway to develop an indicator of child poverty at the local level that will measure the proportion of children in families living in poverty in both out of work and in work families. It is intended that this indicator will be used as the local area agreement child poverty indicator from April 2009 onwards.

Poverty: Elderly

James Clappison: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many and what proportion of 60 to 64 year olds lived in households below 40 per cent. of median income  (a) before and  (b) after deducting household costs in each year since 1997.

Mike O'Brien: Specific information regarding low income for the UK is available in Households Below Average Income 1994-95 to 2006-07. This annual report, which is a National Statistics publication, includes the numbers and proportions of pensioners with incomes below 50 per cent., 60 per cent. and 70 per cent. of median income, and the proportions in persistent poverty.
	Information covering 40 per cent. of median income is not presented in the Households Below Average Income series as it is an unreliable measure of poverty. This is because households stating the lowest incomes to the Family Resources Survey may not actually have the lowest living standards. Many people who report very low incomes appear to have high spending. Hence any statistics on numbers in this group may be misleading. It is also the case that the Institute for Fiscal Studies in their 'Poverty and Inequality in the UK: 2008' report (June 2008) have said
	Levels of material deprivation generally fall as incomes rise, but children in households with less than 40 per cent. of median incomeso-called 'severe' povertyare, on average, less deprived than those in households with between 40 per cent. and 60 per cent. of median income. This reinforces existing concerns that households with the lowest recorded incomes in HBAI are not those with the lowest living standards.
	Some types of minimal income households include:
	Under-recording of very fragmented incomes. If a household draws on a high number of different income sources, some may be omitted from their survey responses.
	Some households will have transitional periods of low income, being between (possibly well paid) jobs at the precise time of survey interview or being self-employed where incomes can vary greatly from year to year. Older households could be waiting to receive a private or company pension, awaiting the outcome of a benefits claim or be in probate after a partner has died.
	There will also be some households who are drawing on savings to cope with perhaps a longer period of minimal incomes.
	Finally, there will be some households who are genuinely having to cope on very low incomes, and perhaps be getting into debt to maintain levels of expenditure.
	Only the final two categories are genuinely low-income, and evidence is that statistics covering below 40 per cent. of median income include a mix of all four categories.
	The information given in the following table should therefore be treated with caution.
	
		
			  Table 1: Number and proportion of 60 to 64-year-olds in households below 40 per cent. of median income 
			 Before housing costs  After housing costs 
			  Coverage  Year  Total number of 60 to 64-year-olds (million)  Number below 40 per cent. of median income (million)  Percentage below 40 per cent. of median income  Number below 40 per cent. of median income (million)  Percentage below 40 per cent. of median income 
			 GB 1997-98 2.7 0.1 5 0.2 6 
			  1998-99 2.7 0.2 5 0.2 6 
			  1999-2000 2.8 0.2 6 0.2 7 
			  2000-01 2.8 0.2 6 0.2 6 
			  2001-02 2.8 0.2 6 0.2 7 
			
			 UK 2002-03 2.9 0.2 7 0.2 7 
			  2003-04 3.0 0.2 7 0.2 7 
			  2004-05 3.0 0.2 6 0.2 7 
			  2005-06 3.1 0.2 6 0.2 7 
			  2006-07 3.2 0.2 6 0.2 7 
			  Notes: 1. These statistics are based on Households Below Average Income data. 2. Data for Northern Ireland has only been collected since 2002-03, so the information shown is for the United Kingdom from 2002-03 to 2006-07, and for Great Britain for 1997-98 to 2001-02. 3. Small changes should be treated with caution as these will be affected by sampling error and variability in non-response. 4. The reference period for Household Below Average Income figures is single financial years. 5. This response includes a lower income threshold of 40 per cent. of the contemporary median income. The data for households with an income lower than 50 per cent. of median is not considered to be accurate as an indicator of living standards. Many of these households while having very low incomes would not be considered poor, but who do genuinely have few sources of income in the short-run. These figures are not National Statistics and caution must be applied because those people stating the lowest incomes in the FRS may not actually have the lowest living standards. 6. The income measures used to derive the estimates shown employ the same methodology as the Department for Work and Pensions publication 'Households Below Average Income' (HBAI) series, which uses disposable household income, adjusted (or equivalised) for household size and composition, as an income measure as a proxy for standard of living. 7. The figures are based on OECD equivalisation factors. 8. Figures have been presented on both a before housing cost and after housing cost basis. For before housing cost, housing costs (such as rent, water rates, mortgage interest payments, structural insurance payments and ground rent and service charges) are not deducted from income, while for after housing cost they are. 
			 9. The Government's preferred measures of low income for pensioners are based on incomes measured after housing costs. Measuring income on an after housing costs basis is appropriate, as two thirds of pensioners own their property outright and so face lower housing costs to meet from their current income while still deriving value from their home. This is different to the current working age population and to the situation for pensioners in the past. Considering pensioners' incomes compared to others after deducting housing costs allows for more meaningful comparisons of income between working age people and pensioners, and between pensioners over time. 10. As part of PSA Delivery Agreement 17 three indicators of low income poverty will be monitored: the percentage of pensioners below 60 per cent. contemporary median income, 50 per cent. median income and 60 per cent. of 1998-99 median income uprated in line with prices.  Source: Households Below Average Income, DWP 
		
	
	Numbers of 60 to 64-year-olds have been rounded to the nearest 100,000 individuals, while proportions of 60 to 64-year-olds have been rounded to the nearest percentage point.

Retirement

Gordon Marsden: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what estimate he has made of the number of employees asked to retire on reaching 65 years of age in each year since 2000.

Anne McGuire: The Department for Work and Pensions was formed in June 2001 and no data is available prior to that date. At that time the compulsory retirement age for the Department was 65 for those below the senior civil service grades. For the years ending September 2001, 2002 and 2003 the numbers of employees who were asked to retire at age 65 were 123, 125 and 131 respectively.
	From October 2003 the Department introduced arrangements that allowed its employees below the senior civil service grades to remain in employment beyond the age of 65. This was formalised in October 2006 when the Department removed its retirement age altogether for employees below the senior civil service grades. Employees can retire, if they wish, when they reach civil service minimum pension age. For most employees that is age 60, but they are not obliged to retire on reaching that age.
	Until October 2006 the mandatory retirement age for senior civil servants was 60. After this date it was raised to 65, where it currently remains. No employees at senior civil service grades in the Department have been asked to retire on reaching age 65.

Approved Premises: Planning Permission

Eric Pickles: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice pursuant to the Answer to the hon. Member for Welwyn, Hatfield of 9 July 2008,  Official Report, columns 1626-27W, on approved premises: planning applications, how many planning applications his Department and its agencies have submitted in the last 24 months in relation to converting residential premises into use as bail hostels; and in what local authority areas.

David Hanson: None.

Criminal Records

Christopher Huhne: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice what proportion of  (a) black,  (b) white and  (c) Asian men have a criminal record, broken down by age.

Jack Straw: The information requested is not available.
	Figures on the proportions of the population with a criminal history in England and Wales can be found in 'Criminal careers of those born between 1953 and 1978' at:
	www.homeoffice.gov.uk/rds/pdfs/hosb401.pdf
	However, this publication does not provide figures for different ethnic groups as the court data from which these figures are derived does not include complete information on the ethnicity of offenders.

Departmental Data Protection

Eleanor Laing: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice 
	(1)  what steps he is taking to prevent future losses of sensitive data by his Department;
	(2)  what steps his Department is taking to implement the new set of mandatory standards for Government Departments as outlined by the Cabinet Office's Data handling procedures in government review;
	(3)  how much has been allocated within his Department to ensure compliance with the new set of minimum mandatory standards, set out in the Cabinet Office's Data handling in government review;
	(4)  how many individuals his Department holds sensitive data on.

Michael Wills: The Ministry of Justice is determined to ensure that all personal information is managed in accordance with the Cabinet Office's Final Report on Data Handling Procedures in Government. The Ministry has set up a dedicated Information Assurance Programme to oversee implementation of the new set of minimum mandatory standards contained in the report. The Ministry expects to spend in the region of 630,000 to cover the costs of managing the programme. Any new development costs will be met from within existing Business Group budgets through re- prioritisation of expenditure.
	The Ministry does not hold a central register of the total number of records it holds containing sensitive data. Such information may be obtained only at disproportionate cost. Each Business Group within the Ministry is required to manage its information in accordance with the Data Protection Act 1998 and the Government's Manual of Protective Security.

Departmental Marketing

Pete Wishart: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice what the cost was of  (a) internet and website design and hosting,  (b) print media design and  (c) broadcast media of each of his Department's public information campaigns since 1997.

Michael Wills: Since my Department was created in May 2007, the Ministry of Justice has spent the following on public information campaigns.
	
		
			  Ministry of Justice 
			   
			(a) internet and website design and hosting  (b) print media design  (c) Broadcast media 
			  Her Majesty's Courts Service 
			 2005-06 Operation Paybackto persuade fine defaulters to pay up Nil Nil (1)94,000 
			  
			  National Offender Management Service 
			 2007-08 Community Sentencing campaignto increase confidence in the effectiveness of criminal justice Nil 3,500 Nil 
			  
			  Office for Criminal Justice Reform 
			 2004-08 Inside Justice Week campaignto make CJS more accessible through a themed week of public and media events (2)48,000 20,600 Nil 
			 (1) Radio (2) 2006 
		
	
	Since the Department for Constitutional Affairs (DCA) was created in April 2003, the Department spent the following on public information campaigns.
	
		
			   
			(a) internet and website design and hosting  (b) print media design  (c) Broadcast media 
			  DCA HQ 
			 2006-07 Domestic Violence campaignto publicise remedies available to victims of domestic violence Nil 485 Nil 
			 2005-06 Voter Registration campaign (18-24)to encourage young people to register to vote 3,000 12,000 (1)62,000 
			  Magistrates Awareness campaignto publicise the role of magistrates within the criminal and civil justice system (2) 19,080 (1)107,000 
			 2002-05 Freedom of Informationto raise awareness of the Freedom of Information Act. (3) (3) (3) 
			  
			  The Court Service 
			 2004-05 Operation Payback Nil Nil (1)95,000 
			 2003-04 Operation Payback Nil Nil (1)79,000 
			  
			  Office of the Public Guardian 
			 2004-05 Powers of attorney campaignto raise awareness of powers of attorney Nil 2,512 Nil 
			 (1) Radio (2) Costs for hosting and design cannot be separated out (3) A total of 387,000 was spent during the three years but available records do not show how this was broken down into broadcast media, print media design or website design and hosting 
		
	
	DCA's predecessor, Lord Chancellor's Department (LCD) launched the Community Legal Service in 2000 to inform people where to go for civil legal advice, help and representation. A total of 1,347,000 was spent on advertising but a separate figure for broadcast media cannot be identified. Further details regarding spend on this campaign is not available.

Departmental Public Participation

Eleanor Laing: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how much funding he has allocated to citizens' juries planned to be held in the next six months.

Michael Wills: The Ministry of Justice is not scheduled to hold any citizens' juries in the next six months. We are currently considering the budgeting and procurement of the citizens' summit to consider issues around election day and for the development of a Statement of Values.

Domestic Violence

Theresa May: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice 
	(1)  how many programmes which work with the perpetrators of domestic violence are in operation in the criminal justice system; how many men have taken part in such programmes in each of the last 10 years; how many men are on waiting lists for such programmes; and what work has been done to develop national standards for perpetrator programmes outside the criminal justice system;
	(2)  how many prisoners have completed the Healthy Relationships programme; how many prisons operate the programme; and what assessment he has made of the effectiveness of the programme.

Jack Straw: There are three programmes which have been accredited by the Correctional Services Accreditation Panel specifically for use with perpetrators of domestic violence. The Community Domestic Violence Programme (CDVP) and the Integrated Domestic Abuse Programme (IDAP) are used in the community, and the Healthy Relationships Programme (HRP) in prison. Other programmes have also been accredited by the panel that may be appropriate depending on particular risks and needs.
	The following table sets out the number of new community orders or licences with a requirement to attend an accredited domestic violence programme, the number of offenders who have commenced a programme in the community or completed one in prison since the programmes were introduced.
	
		
			   New orders or licences with a requirement to attend a domestic violence programme( 1)  CDVP/IDAP commencements( 1)  HRP completions by prisoners 
			 2003-04   28 
			 2004-05   30 
			 2005-06 3,425 2,084 57 
			 2006-07 6,200 3,635 60 
			 2007-08 6,479 4,313 82 
			 Total 16,104 10,032 257 
			 (1) The data is based on information provided from probation areas and includes those who specifically receive a domestic violence programme, but not those who were convicted of a domestic violence offence who were sentenced to undertake another intervention. 
		
	
	The numbers awaiting to start a programme on a given day during the year will vary depending on the sentences received, the resources available in the area concerned, matching demand, the individual's circumstances e.g. further court appearance, their motivation, other domestic factors, and possibly an assessment as to whether the programme will meet their risks and needs. There can also be a lead in time while offenders prepare for the courses.
	Offenders waiting for a place on a Domestic Violence programme are under the supervision of their offender manager from the day of sentence. The offender manager will monitor the risk posed by the offender and actively manage it.
	The Home Office has funded a project to ensure perpetrator programmes delivered outside the criminal justice system will also be subject to agreed national standards.
	The Healthy Relationships Programme is now delivered in six establishments. Garth prison has just started delivering the programme. There is an ongoing assessment of prisoners' participation in the programme. As the numbers completing the programme increase further, analysis will be undertaken.
	A process study has been commissioned to look at the delivery of the Healthy Relationships Programme and the Community Domestic Violence and Integrated Domestic Abuse Programmes which will include an examination of the data collected and interviews with staff and programme participants.

Electoral Commission: Public Appointments

Eleanor Laing: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice whether he plans to carry out a consultation on the proposal to appoint electoral commissioners who have recent party political experience.

Bridget Prentice: The Government White Paper, Party finance and expenditure in the United Kingdom (CM7329), committed the Government to implement the Committee on Standards in Public Life's recommendation to allow the appointment of a minority of Commissioners with recent experience of political life. The Committee's report took into account research and evidence from interested parties, including the Electoral Commission themselves.
	Sir Hayden Phillips' Review of the Funding of Political Parties and the Constitutional Affairs Select Committee also endorsed this recommendation, which the Government intends to implement through the Political Parties and Elections Bill which was introduced to Parliament on 17 July. The passage of the Bill through Parliament will present a further opportunity for Members to consider this proposal.

Information Commissioner: Secondment

Dai Davies: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice pursuant to the Answer of 14 July 2008,  Official Report, columns 64-65W, on the Information Commissioner, what safeguards apply to secondees from Government departments to the Information Commissioner's Office to ensure they may not handle appeals relating to their departments.

Michael Wills: The Information Commissioner's Office (ICO) is an independent body created by statute. Its responsibilities include handling complaints made under the Data Protection Act 1998, Freedom of Information Act 2000, Privacy and Electronic Communications Regulations 2003 and Environmental Information Regulations 2004.
	There is a clear process in place at the ICO for ensuring that individuals seconded to the ICO will not handle complaints from their own Department. A line manager who works for the ICO will allocate freedom of information complaints to the secondees from Government Departments who will be working at the ICO. The line manager will ensure that the secondees do not handle complaints involving their home Department. A permanent member of the ICO's staff will oversee the work of secondees and in conjunction with the ICO policy team will ensure consistency. Secondees will not be authorised to sign decision notices. Only senior established ICO employees can sign notices.

National Identity

Eleanor Laing: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice 
	(1)  what the planned timetable for the development of a British statement of values is;
	(2)  what progress has been made in the development of a framework for a public engagement process to develop a British statement of values.

Michael Wills: We are currently finalising a process of engagement to inform the debate on the Statement of Values. This will involve a series of events around the country, a programme of online engagement and a range of discussion pieces. The process will culminate in a Citizens' summita broadly representative sample of the British people who will be asked to develop the framework for the Statement of Values and make recommendations on its uses. We expect to make an announcement in the autumn.

National Identity

Eleanor Laing: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how much has been spent on consultative exercises and initiatives in relation to the development of a British statement of values, broken down by event.

Michael Wills: A series of events to support The Governance of Britain programme, including discussion on national identity and the Statement of Values, is currently under way. Final costs will be available once the events are complete. We have also undertaken some work with consultants to support development of the engagement process on the Statement of Values. This has been provided at a cost of 5,000.

Parole Board: Leeds

John Battle: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how many caseworkers were employed by the Parole Board in  (a) Leeds West constituency and  (b) Leeds Metropolitan District to deal with (i) oral and (ii) written hearings in each year since 1997.

Maria Eagle: I am advised by the Parole Board that they do not employ any caseworkers in Leeds. All caseworkers are based at the Board's London office apart from one who is based in Nottingham. Information on the number of caseworkers employed to deal with oral and paper hearings is contained in the following tables.
	
		
			  (i) Number of caseworkers on oral hearings 
			   Permanent  Temp/Agency 
			 2004-05 23 2 
			 2005-06 27 4 
			 2006-07 29 1 
			 2007-08 29 5 
			 2008-09 24 7 
		
	
	
		
			  (ii) Number of caseworkers on paper hearings 
			   Permanent  Temp/Agency 
			 2004-05 16 1 
			 2005-06 13 5 
			 2006-07 11 8 
			 2007-08 15 6 
			 2008-09 13 4

Prisoners Release

Edward Garnier: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how many prisoners were released on temporary licence in each of the last 10 years.

David Hanson: Records are not held of the number of prisoners granted temporary release. The number of temporary release licences issued in each year since 1997 from all prison establishments in England and Wales can be found in the following table:
	
		
			   Number of temporary release licences issued 
			 1997 227,078 
			 1998 255,886 
			 1999 256,179 
			 2000 256,838 
			 2001 270,122 
			 2002 287,732 
			 2003 328,777 
			 2004 389,548 
			 2005 405,259 
			 2006 400,238 
		
	
	These figures are taken from table 10.6 of Offender Management Caseload Statistics 2006 copies of which can be found in the House of Commons Library. The data above is the total of all individual licences issued. Some prisoners will be granted temporary release on a number of occasions and so will be issued with multiple licences over the course of a year.
	Release on temporary licence is the mechanism that enables prisoners to participate in necessary activities, outside of the prison establishment, that directly contribute to their resettlement into the community and their development of a purposeful law abiding life. Prisoners are not granted temporary release unless they meet the eligibility criteria and pass a stringent risk assessment.
	These figures have been drawn from administrative IT systems, which, as with any large scale recording system, are subject to possible errors with data entry and processing.

Prisoners Release: Employment

John Battle: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice what schemes are in place in Leeds to assist prisoners in getting employment upon release; and if he will make a statement.

Maria Eagle: The National Offender Management Service is committed to increasing job opportunities and employment for prisoners on release. There are a currently a number of such schemes in Leeds including services provided by the West Yorkshire Probation Area and Department for Work and Pensions. At HMP Leeds itself a range of schemes are available to help prisoners into work including Jobcentre plus, a Job club, a Job linkto help retain employment for offenders with short sentences; annual job fairs and a range of vocational qualifications and preparation for work training programmes.

Prisons: Waste Management

Ashok Kumar: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice what guidance he provides to prisons on reducing waste from the meals they provide.

Maria Eagle: It is the policy of the National Offender Management Service not to waste food.
	Prison Service Order 5000 (Prison Catering Services) provides staff with guidance on food waste including a number of practical measures and management actions necessary to keep waste to a minimum. These include the use of pre select menus and portion control.

Reoffenders

Lady Hermon: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how many and what proportion of defendants released early under the end of custody licence scheme have re-offended during their additional early release period.

Jack Straw: All defendants released under the end of custody scheme are sentenced offenders.
	The available information on numbers of offenders released on ECL and those recalled because of alleged re-offending is published monthly, in the statistical bulletin End of Custody Licence releases and recalls, available from the Library of the House and the Ministry of Justice website at the following address:
	www.justice.gov.uk/publications/endofcustodylicence.htm
	(The same publication includes details of the eligibility criteria for offenders released under the scheme).
	There were 402 individuals alleged to have committed offences during their period of ECL, notified to NOMS Public Protection Unit, for the period 29 June 2007 to 31 May 2008. This represents 1 per cent. of the total number of offenders released under the scheme for the same period, 28,879.
	These figures have been drawn from administrative IT systems, which, as with any large scale recording system, are subject to possible errors with data entry and processing.

Secure Training Centres: Restraint Techniques

Geoffrey Cox: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice if he will publish the review of restraint in juvenile secure settings.

David Hanson: I refer the hon. Member to my previous answer to the hon. Member for Northampton, North (Ms Keeble) on 15 July 2008,  Official Report, column 367W.
	The Government are giving careful consideration to the recommendations of the chairs of the independent review of restraint in juvenile secure settings, Andrew Williamson and Peter Smallridge. We intend to publish the chairs' full report alongside our response to its recommendations by the end of October.

Young Offenders: Custodial Treatment

Madeleine Moon: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice what estimate has been made of the average length of time taken to transfer money between young offender institutions when young people are transferred; and if he will make a statement.

David Hanson: While no specific assessment has been made of the length of time taken to transfer money between young offender institutions, the timings are dependant on where the offender is transferring to and from. For example, if the money being transferred is between public prisons, then it is processed as an electronic transfer and will be actioned overnight. When a transfer takes place to other types of establishments such as contracted out prisons or immigration detention centres (for those over 18), the money would be transferred by cheque which would be subject to the normal cheque clearing process operated by the banking system.

Young Offenders: Legal Aid

Harry Cohen: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice if he will make it his policy for all children in contact with the criminal justice system to be entitled to free legal advice and representation in relation to such contact.

Maria Eagle: Legal aid is widely available to children and young people when they come into contact with the criminal justice system. All those interviewed by police must be informed of their right to non means-tested legal advice. A young person under 17 must also have an 'appropriate adult' with them when interviewed by the police; this could be a parent, guardian, social or health care professional.
	If a youth appears before court, legal representation is provided free of charge subject to the youth passing the 'Interests of Justice' test. If a youth does not have their own solicitor, the court duty solicitor can provide free advice and, if appropriate, representation.
	While in the vast majority of cases, youths are properly represented at court, the Government are currently exploring how youth defendants can be made better aware of their rights to advice and representation. It is also carrying out additional research to assess whether there are any vulnerable youths going without representation, and if so, to identify appropriate remedies.

Young Offenders: Local Authorities

David Kidney: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice if he will discuss with local government representatives proposals to transfer child detention budgets to local authorities.

Beverley Hughes: I have been asked to reply.
	There are no current proposals to transfer child detention budgets to local authorities. The Youth Crime Action plan sets out proposals to make local authorities responsible for the full cost of court-ordered secure remand. They are already responsible for the placement and for one-third of the costs where the secure estate is used and the full cost where alternative provision is used. We are consulting on this proposal and will have further discussions with local government representatives as part of that process and prior to any final decisions.

Young Offenders: Rehabilitation

David Kidney: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice what steps his Department is taking to involve the families of young offenders in their rehabilitation following a period of detention.

Beverley Hughes: I have been asked to reply.
	The Youth Crime Action plan sets out the Government's intention to develop a comprehensive package of support for children leaving custody. This would include conducting on ongoing assessments of a young person's risk of re-offending and their underlying needsincluding family factorsto shape the provision they receive.
	Through the family pathfinders work we will also explore if a family needs assessment framework can be developed to include regular reviews with the family (including young people where appropriate} and other agencies.
	We also signalled our intention to ensure that all assessments of children in custody consider the family need and the support required to enable the child to return to their family on release.

Youth Citizenship Commission: Operating Costs

Eleanor Laing: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice what the annual running costs were of the Youth Citizenship Commission in the latest period for which figures are available.

Bridget Prentice: The Youth Citizenship Commission is scheduled to report in spring 2009. The staff costs, and travel and subsistence costs for staff and Commissioners, are expected to total up to 135,500 for the life of the Commission.
	In addition, the Commission will incur the costs of funding research; engagement events around the UK; and a website; and will have publishing costs. We have not yet finalised the contracts relating to these elements, so I cannot provide precise figures at this stage. I will however write to you with more information in the autumn once contracts are in place.

10 Downing Street: Manpower

Francis Maude: To ask the Chancellor of the Duchy of Lancaster pursuant to the answer of 19 June 2008,  Official Report, column 1184W, on 10 Downing street: manpower, what the job titles and specifications are of each of the 10 staff in the House Management Team.

Tom Watson: Information about the contractual terms of individual members of staff is personal information between the employer and employee and therefore not disclosed. The cost and number of No. 10 staff are published annually.

Civil Servants: Holiday Leave

Francis Maude: To ask the Chancellor of the Duchy of Lancaster whether privilege day holidays for civil servants are the same for all Government Departments.

Tom Watson: The Civil Service Management Code grants Departments authority to determine their own arrangements for privilege holidays provided the day for the Queen's official birthday is on either the Friday preceding or the Tuesday after the spring bank holiday.
	The Civil Service Management code can be found at
	http://www.civilservice.gov.uk/iam/codes/csmc/index.asp

Electoral Register

Madeleine Moon: To ask the Chancellor of the Duchy of Lancaster what the  (a) highest,  (b) average and  (c) lowest percentage of voter registration in local authority areas in England was in the most recent period for which figures are available.

Tom Watson: The information requested falls within the responsibility of the UK Statistics Authority. I have asked the Authority to reply.
	 Letter from Karen Dunnell, dated July 2008:
	As National Statistician I have been asked to reply to your question asking what the  (a) highest,  (b) average and  (c) lowest percentage of voter registration in local authority areas in England is for the most recent period for which figures are available. (218826)
	The closest available approximation to the percentage of voter registration is the number of people who are registered to vote in the local/European elections as a percent of the estimated usually resident population age 18 and over.
	The proxy percentages should not be interpreted as the percentage of the eligible population who are registered to vote. They may be an under estimates in some areas because not everyone who is usually resident is entitled to vote, for example foreign citizens from outside of the EU and Commonwealth are not eligible.
	Conversely, for other areas rates exceed one hundred per cent as figures for the registered electorate may be inflated. People who have more than one address may register in more than one place (e.g. students may register at parental and term-time addresses) and electoral registration officers vary in how quickly they remove people from the registers after they have moved away from an area or died.
	Bearing these caveats in mind the highest, average and lowest percentage of voter registration in local authority areas in England, for 2006, are 101.9%, 96.5% and 68.6% respectively. 2006 is the most recent year that estimates of the usually resident population are available.

Employment: North East

Alan Milburn: To ask the Chancellor of the Duchy of Lancaster how many  (a) part-time and  (b) full-time jobs there were in (i) Darlington constituency, (ii) County Durham and (iii) the North East in each year since 1997.

Tom Watson: The information requested falls within the responsibility of the UK Statistics Authority. I have asked the Authority to reply.
	 Letter from Karen Dunnell, dated 22 July 2008:
	As National Statistician I have been asked to reply to your Parliamentary Question on how many (a) part-time and (b) full-time jobs there were in (i) Darlington constituency, (ii) County Durham and (iii) the North East in each year since 1997. (219626).
	The Office for National Statistics compiles employment statistics for local areas from the Annual Population Survey (APS) and its predecessor the annual Labour Force Survey (LFS). This is the preferred source for estimates at the detailed level requested although the estimates refer to the number of people in employment rather than the number of jobs.
	The attached table provides estimates of the number of people aged 16 and over, in full and part-time employment, resident in Darlington, County Durham and the North East.
	As some of these estimates are for a subset of the population in small geographical areas, they are based on small sample sizes, and are therefore subject to large margins of uncertainty.
	
		
			  Number of people, aged 16 and over, in full and part time( 1)  employment, resident in Darlington parliamentary constituency( 2) , County Durham( 3)  and the North East( 4) , 1998-2007 
			  Thousand 
			   Darlington( 2)  County Durham( 3)  North East( 4) 
			  12 months ending:  Full time  Part time  Total  Full time  Part time  Total  Full time  Part time  Total 
			 February 1998(5) 28 11 39 163 49 211 779 281 1,060 
			 February 1999(5) 29 11 40 165 45 210 780 273 1,053 
			 February 2000(5) 26 11 37 169 51 219 761 287 1,048 
			 February 2001(5) 31 10 41 166 49 215 794 280 1,074 
			 February 2002(5) 31 10 41 160 52 212 796 279 1,075 
			 February 2003(5) 29 10 40 149 46 196 802 280 1,082 
			 February 2004(5) 30 10 40 152 44 196 809 282 1,091 
			 March 2005(6) 30 10 40 169 49 219 835 289 1,124 
			 March 2006(6) 29 10 38 168 50 218 850 286 1,136 
			 March 2007(6) 29 11 40 175 58 233 860 294 1,153 
			 (1) Includes those full-time and part-time on new deal. (2) 1995 parliamentary constituency boundary to February 2004, 2005 parliamentary constituency boundary revision thereafter. (3) Local authority district. (4) Government office region. (5) Based on annual Labour Force Survey (LFS). (6) Based on Annual Population Survey (APS).  Notes: 1. As these estimates are for a subset of the population in a small geographical area, they are based on small sample sizes, and are therefore subject to large margins of uncertainty. 2. Totals may not sum because of rounding. 3. Figures are based on the most recent population estimates published in 2007.  Source: ONS Annual Population Survey and annual Labour Force Survey

Food: Prices

David Simpson: To ask the Chancellor of the Duchy of Lancaster what the estimated average  (a) monthly and  (b) annual food bills for families in (i) England and Wales and (ii) in each region were in each of the last three years.

Tom Watson: The information requested falls within the responsibility of the UK Statistics Authority. I have asked the Authority to reply.
	 Letter from Karen Dunnell, dated 22 July 2008:
	As National Statistician, I have been asked to reply to your recent question asking what the estimated average  (a) monthly and  (b) annual food bills for families in England and Wales were in each of the last three years (i) in total and (ii) broken down by region (220593).
	Estimates of household expenditure appear in the annual ONS publication Family Spending. The following table shows the estimates of household spending on food and non-alcoholic drink for England, English regions and for Wales, as they have appeared in the last three editions of Family Spending. These estimates exclude spending on food and drink in cafes, restaurants, and pubs, as well as take away food and snack food which are all classified as catering services.
	The estimates published in Family Spending are based on data collected through the Expenditure and Food Survey (EFS), which is a sample survey, covering approximately 6,000 households in the United Kingdom. Estimates for regions are normally based on data collected over three years, and estimates based on data for the periods 2002-03 to 2004-05, and 2003-04 to 2005-06 have been provided in the following table. Starting with the most recent edition of Family Spending, Family Spending 2007, which published data for 2006, estimates are now published for calendar years, and rather than calculate an average of data from financial and calendar years, regional estimates in Family Spending 2007 were based solely on data collected in 2006.
	
		
			  Household expenditure on food and non-alcoholic drink by region: England and Wales, 2002-03 to 2006( 1) 
			   
			   2002-03 to 2004-05  2003-04 to 2005-06  2006 
			  Expenditure per month( 2)
			 England 190 190 200 
			 North East 170 170 170 
			 North West 190 190 190 
			 Yorkshire and the Humber 170 170 200 
			 East Midlands 190 190 210 
			 West Midlands 180 180 200 
			 Eastern 200 210 210 
			 London 190 200 220 
			 South East 200 200 210 
			 South West 190 190 200 
			 
			 Wales 180 190 180 
			 
			  Expenditure per year( 2)
			 England 2,270 2,230 2,440 
			 North East 2,080 2,070 2,090 
			 North West 2,220 2,240 2,230 
			 Yorkshire and the Humber 2,060 2,090 2,410 
			 East Midlands 2,290 2,330 2,500 
			 West Midlands 2,190 2,210 2,450 
			 Eastern 2,400 2,500 2,510 
			 London 2,330 2,420 2,620 
			 South East 2,410 2,440 2,560 
			 South West 2,290 2,330 2,370 
			 
			 Wales 2,170 2,250 2,200 
			 (1) Estimates for regions are normally based on data collected over three years. Starting with the most recent edition of family spending, Family Spending 2007, which published data for 2006, estimates are now published for calendar years, and rather than average data from financial and calendar years, regional estimates in Family Spending 2007 were based solely on data collected in 2006. (2) Figures rounded to the nearest 10.  Source:  Family spending, ONS

Immigration

James Clappison: To ask the Chancellor of the Duchy of Lancaster for which non-EEA countries there was  (a) an excess of emigration from the UK over immigration to the UK and  (b) an excess of immigration to the UK over emigration (i) in 1987 to 1997 and (ii) since 1997; and what the size of the excess was in each case.

Tom Watson: The information requested falls within the responsibility of the UK Statistics Authority. I have asked the authority to reply.
	 Letter from Karen Dunnell, dated 22 July 2008:
	As National Statistician, I have been asked to reply to your question for which non-EEA countries there was (a) an excess of emigration from the UK over immigration to the UK and (b) an excess of immigration to the UK over emigration (i) in 1987 to 1997 and (ii) since 1997; and what the size of the excess was in each case. (221210)
	Table 1, attached, provides the top three non-EEA countries with net immigration and with net emigration figures for 1987 to 2006. Only the top three are provided to ensure that the estimates are reliable. Data are grouped by year because they are readily available in this format. The figures are based on the International Passenger Survey and care should be taken when interpreting net migration estimates since a small net migration figure may mask large immigration and emigration flows.
	
		
			  Table 1: Migration estimates by non-EEA country of last or next residence, 1987 to 2006top three countries 
			  United Kingdom (thousand) 
			   Immigration  Emigration  Net migration 
			  1987-1991
			 Pakistan 49 15 +34 
			 New Zealand 64 34 +30 
			 Bangladesh 31 6 +26 
			 
			 Canada 32 56 -25 
			 United States of America 135 170 -35 
			 Australia 119 198 -79 
			 
			  1992-1997
			 India 42 12 +30 
			 Pakistan 39 11 +28 
			 South Africa 48 30 +19 
			 
			 New Zealand 50 64 -14 
			 United States of America 148 178 -30 
			 Australia 121 174 -53 
			 
			  1998-2002
			 South Africa 113 36 +77 
			 China 73 10 +63 
			 India 70 14 +56 
			 
			 Switzerland 14 20 -6 
			 United States of America 142 151 -9 
			 Australia 200 219 -19 
			 
			  2003-2006
			 India 176 25 +152 
			 Pakistan 91 13 +77 
			 China 105 37 +68 
			 
			 Canada 31 42 -11 
			 New Zealand 51 84 -33 
			 Australia 149 230 -81 
			 + Denotes a net inflow figure - Denotes a net outflow figure Notes: 1. Based on data from the International Passenger Survey. Excludes adjustments for (1) those whose intended length of stay changes so that their migrant status changes; (2) asylum seekers and their dependants not identified by the IPS; and (3) flows between the UK and the Republic of Ireland. 2. Figures have been rounded independently and may not add to totals. Source: International Passenger Survey

Children in Care: Truancy

Tim Loughton: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families how many children in care were absent from school without authorisation in each of the last 10 years.

Jim Knight: Information is not collected in the format requested. However figures on the number of looked after children who missed at least 25 days of school are shown in the table.
	
		
			  Number and percentage of looked after children who had been looked after continuously for at least 12 months and who missed at least 25 days of school( 1) 12 months ending 30 September 2000-07, England 
			   Looked after children 
			   Number( 2)  Percentage 
			 2000 4,000 12.0 
			 2001 4,100 12.2 
			 2002 4,100 12.0 
			 2003 4,400 12.4 
			 2004 4,300 12.3 
			 2005 4,400 12.6 
			 2006 4,600 13.4 
			 2007 4,400 13.0 
			 (1) Includes authorised and unauthorised absence. (2) Figures have been rounded to the nearest 100.

Children: Protection

David Drew: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families how many people resident in Stroud constituency are on List 99.

Kevin Brennan: The identification of the number of individuals registered on List 99 who have home addresses in Stroud would require each of the case records to be checked. This could be undertaken only at disproportionate cost and would only provide historical information correct at the time at which the individuals concerned were registered.
	Once an individual is on List 99, a standard or enhanced Criminal Records Bureau (CRB) disclosure will reveal the barred status of that individual to an employer together with details of any criminal convictions. Information on an individual's address at the time of listing is not necessary in order to check whether that person is barred.

Children: Wheelchairs

Mark Harper: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families what progress has been made in improving the provision of wheelchair services for children and young people since the publication of the Aiming High for Disabled Children document in May 2007.

Ivan Lewis: I have been asked to reply.
	The Transforming Community Equipment and Wheelchair Services Programme (TCEWS) was set up on 2006 to design a radial new model for delivery of both community equipment and wheelchairs in England. The remit of the programme was to place service users and carers at the heart of any new service model and build on the strengths of the third and private sector. The overall aim was to develop a new high quality system for delivering equipment which would give those supported by the state the sort of choice and control they have not previously enjoyed. Responsibility for assessment if need remains with local health and social care commissioners.
	The programme has developed a business case for a new model of delivery of wheelchair services which is currently being considered.

Departmental Catering

Michael Moore: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families pursuant to the answer of 26 February 2008,  Official Report, column 1539W, on the Fairtrade initiative, how much his Department spent on refreshments for official departmental meetings and engagements in each of the last three financial years; and what percentage of this total was spent on Fairtrade products.

Kevin Brennan: The Department for Children, Schools and Families (DCSF) financial systems does not hold information on the amount of spend incurred purely for refreshments. The information held identifies hospitality spend which includes buffets as well as refreshments. Therefore the information could be provided only at disproportionate costs. All refreshments provided by our catering provider, Aramark, for internal meetings and functions is Fairtrade.
	The Department was created on 28 June 2007 and the hospitality spend for the financial year 2007-08 was 354,769.

Departmental Manpower

John Redwood: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families what the change in the number of employees of his Department has been since it was established.

Kevin Brennan: The Department was established as part of the Machinery of Government changes of 28 June 2007 with the vast majority of staff coming from the former Department for Education and Skills (DfES). At the point of establishment there were 2,774.6 full-time equivalent (FTE) employees in my Department. At 30 June 2008 there were 2,586.6 FTE employees, so there has been a net reduction of 188 FTE employees.

Departmental Research

Bob Spink: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families what proportion of his Department's budget and that of its predecessor was used for research within its areas of responsibility in each of the last 10 years.

Edward Balls: The proportion of my Department's budget and that of its predecessors which was spent on research in each of the past 10 years is shown in the following table.
	
		
			   Total departmental spending (DEL and AME) by DCSF or its predecessor( 1)  ( billion)  Social research expenditure as a proportion of total departmental expenditure (DEL and AME) by DCSF and its predecessors( 2)  (Percentage) 
			 1998-99 17.863 0.03 
			 1999-2000 18.970 0.03 
			 2000-01 20.885 0.05 
			 2001-02 23.482 0.03 
			 2002-03 20.263 0.05 
			 2003-04 21.789 0.05 
			 2004-05 22.734 0.06 
			 2005-06 26.497 0.08 
			 2006-07 54.568 0.05 
			 2007-08 60.887 0.04 
			 (1) Source: 1998-99 to 2001-02 figures are from the Department for Education and Skills departmental report 2003, Annex. 2002-03 figures onwards are from DCSF departmental report 2008, Annex A. (2) Details of the expenditure on research funded from the central research budget is available for the full period requested. However, expenditure on research funded by individual policy budgets has only been recorded centrally since 2005-06.

Education: Assessments

Michael Gove: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families if he will place in the Library a copy of the contract agreed and signed between the Qualifications and Curriculum Authority and ETS in 2007.

Jim Knight: holding answer 21 July 2008
	The administration and marking of national curriculum tests is a function of the Qualifications and Curriculum Authority (QCA) that is delivered independently of Government. The National Assessment Agency (NAA) oversees the marking process which is delivered by ETS Europe, the new test delivery contractor, on the QCA's behalf. I have therefore asked David Gee, Managing Director of the NAA, to write to the hon. Member. A copy of his letter has been placed in the Library.
	 Letter from David Gee, dated 21 July 2008:
	The Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families, right hon. Ed Balls, has asked me to write to you to answer parliamentary question 220150.
	The information you have requested is subject to an obligation of confidentiality and is commercially sensitive and cannot be provided.

Education: Assessments

Nick Gibb: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families if he will arrange for the key stage 2 and key stage 3 standard assessment tests taken in 2008 to be re-marked.

Jim Knight: The National Assessment Agency (NAA), which administers the Key Stage 2 and Key Stage 3 national curriculum tests, has arrangements in place for schools to seek a review of the marking of test if they find evidence that the mark scheme has not been properly applied.

Family Law

Henry Bellingham: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families what proportion of family court cases involved a CAFCASS representative in the last period for which figures are available.

Kevin Brennan: The information requested is not available. Separate statistics are collected by the Ministry of Justice and CAFCASS; proportions cannot be calculated from the statistics because they are collected for different business purposes.

Pre-school Education

David Davis: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families how many free early education places have been available in  (a) Kingston-Upon-Hull,  (b) East Riding of Yorkshire,  (c) North Lincolnshire and  (d) North East Lincolnshire in each year since 1997.

Beverley Hughes: The available information on the number of part-time funded places filled by three and four-year-olds in Kingston upon Hull, East Riding of Yorkshire, North Lincolnshire and North East Lincolnshire local authority areas is shown in the tables.
	All three and four-year-olds are entitled to a free part-time early education place for 12.5 hours per week for 38 weeks of the year. From 2010, this offer will be extended from 12.5 to 15 hours per week for 38 weeks of the year.
	
		
			  Part-time equivalent number of free early education places( 1, 2)  fitted by three and four-year-olds. Local authority: Kingston upon Hull, City of: Position in January each year 
			   3-year-olds  4-year-olds 
			   Maintained nursery and primary schools( 3)  Other maintained and private, voluntary and independent providers  Total 3-year-olds  Maintained nursery and primary schools( 4)  Other maintained and private, voluntary and independent providers  Total 4-year-olds 
			 1997 2,200 n/a 2,200 n/a n/a (5, 6)3,500 
			 1998 2,300 n/a 2,300 n/a n/a (5, 6)3,500 
			 1999 2,300 n/a 2,300 n/a n/a (5, 6)3,300 
			 2000 2,100 (7)460 2,600 n/a n/a (5, 6)3,500 
			 2001 2,000 (7)520 2,600 n/a n/a (5, 6)3,200 
			 2002 1,900 (7)650 2,600 2,700 (5)270 3,000 
			 2003 1,800 (7)760 2,600 2,600 (8)290 2,900 
			 2004 1,700 (9)740 2,500 2,500 (10)280 2,800 
			 2005 1,700 (9)810 2,500 2,400 (10)260 2,700 
			 2006 1,600 (9)790 2,400 2,400 (10)270 2,700 
			 2007 1,700 (9)870 2,600 2,300 (10)280 2,600 
			 2008 1,800 (9)940 2,700 2,500 (10)300 2,800 
			 (1 )A place is equal to five or more sessions and can be filled by more than one child. (2) Figures are rounded to the nearest 100 if they exceed 1,000 and to the nearest 10 otherwise. (3 )Headcount of children aged three at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the School Census. (4 )Headcount of children aged four at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the School Census. (5 )Part-time equivalent number of children aged four at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Nursery Education Grant data collection exercise. (6 )For the years 1997 to 2001, four-year-old sub-national figures from the Nursery Education Grant data collection exercise can not be disaggregated between the maintained and private, voluntary and independent sectors. (7 )Part-time equivalent number of children aged three at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Nursery Education Grant data collection exercise. (8 )Part-time equivalent number of children aged four at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Early Years Census supplementary data collection exercise and the School Census. (9 )Part-time equivalent number of children aged three at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Early Years Census and the School Census. (10 )Part-time equivalent number of children aged four at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Early Years Census and the School Census. 
		
	
	
		
			  Part-time equivalent number of free early education places( 1, 2)  fitted by three and four-year-olds. Local authority:  East Riding of Yorkshire : Position in January each year 
			   3-year-olds  4-year-olds 
			   Maintained nursery and primary schools( 3)  Other maintained and private, voluntary and independent providers  Total 3-year-olds  Maintained nursery and primary schools( 4)  Other maintained and private, voluntary and independent providers  Total 4-year-olds 
			 1997 1,100 n/a 1,100 n/a n/a (5, 6)3,200 
			 1998 1,100 n/a 1,100 n/a n/a (5, 6)3,400 
			 1999 1,100 n/a 1,100 n/a n/a (5, 6)3,400 
			 2000 1,000 (7) 1,000 n/a n/a (5, 6)3,500 
			 2001 1,000 (8)140 1,200 n/a n/a (5, 6)3,400 
			 2002 1,100 (8)140 1,200 2,800 (5)730 3,500 
			 2003 1,100 (8)1,200 2,200 2,700 (9)900 3,600 
			 2004 1,000 (10)1,200 2,200 2,600 (11)820 3,400 
			 2005 1,000 (10)1,500 2,500 2,400 (11)710 3,100 
			 2006 960 (10)1,800 2,700 2,500 (11)740 3,200 
			 2007 990 (10)1,900 2,900 2,400 (11)730 3,100 
			 2008 1,100 (10)1,900 3,000 2,400 (11)820 3,200 
			 (1 )A place is equal to five or more sessions and can be filled by more than one child. (2) Figures are rounded to the nearest 100 if they exceed 1,000 and to the nearest 10 otherwise. (3 )Headcount of children aged three at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the School Census. (4 )Headcount of children aged four at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the School Census. (5 )Part-time equivalent number of children aged four at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Nursery Education Grant data collection exercise. (6 )For the years 1997 to 2001, four-year-old sub-national figures from the Nursery Education Grant data collection exercise can not be disaggregated between the maintained and private, voluntary and independent sectors. (7) Less than five. (8)( )Part-time equivalent number of children aged three at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Nursery Education Grant data collection exercise. (9)( )Part-time equivalent number of children aged four at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Early Years Census supplementary data collection exercise and the School Census. (10)Part-time equivalent number of children aged three at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Early Years Census and the School Census. (11)( )Part-time equivalent number of children aged four at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Early Years Census and the School Census. 
		
	
	
		
			  Part-time equivalent number of free early education places( 1, 2)  fitted by three and four-year-olds. Local authority: North Lincolnshire: Position in January each year 
			   3-year-olds  4-year-olds 
			   Maintained nursery and primary schools( 3)  Other maintained and private, voluntary and independent providers  Total 3-year-olds  Maintained nursery and primary schools( 4)  Other maintained and private, voluntary and independent providers  Total 4-year-olds 
			 1997 520 n/a 520 n/a n/a (5, 6)1,800 
			 1998 550 n/a 550 n/a n/a (5, 6)1,800 
			 1999 550 n/a 550 n/a n/a (5, 6)1,800 
			 2000 590 (7) 600 n/a n/a (5, 6)2,000 
			 2001 640 (8)540 1,200 n/a n/a (5, 6)1,800 
			 2002 660 (8)760 1,400 1,500 (5)200 1,700 
			 2003 570 (8)700 1,300 1,600 (9)220 1,800 
			 2004 690 (10)820 1,500 1,400 (11)220 1,600 
			 2005 680 (10)800 1,500 1,600 (11)230 1,800 
			 2006 770 (10)710 1,500 1,600 (11)170 1,700 
			 2007 780 (10)720 1,500 1,500 (11)170 1,700 
			 2008 810 (10)810 1,600 1,500 (11)200 1,700 
			 (1 )A place is equal to five or more sessions and can be filled by more than one child. (2) Figures are rounded to the nearest 100 if they exceed 1,000 and to the nearest 10 otherwise. (3 )Headcount of children aged three at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the School Census. (4 )Headcount of children aged four at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the School Census. (5 )Part-time equivalent number of children aged four at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Nursery Education Grant data collection exercise. (6 )For the years 1997 to 2001, four-year-old sub-national figures from the Nursery Education Grant data collection exercise can not be disaggregated between the maintained and private, voluntary and independent sectors. (7) Less than five. (8 )Part-time equivalent number of children aged three at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Nursery Education Grant data collection exercise. (9 )Part-time equivalent number of children aged four at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Early Years Census supplementary data collection exercise and the School Census. (10)Part-time equivalent number of children aged three at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Early Years Census and the School Census. (11 )Part-time equivalent number of children aged four at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Early Years Census and the School Census. 
		
	
	
		
			  Part-time equivalent number of free early education places( 1, 2)  fitted by three and four-year-olds. Local authority:  North East Lincolnshire : Position in January each year 
			   3-year-olds  4-year-olds 
			   Maintained nursery and primary schools( 3)  Other maintained and private, voluntary and independent providers  Total 3-year-olds  Maintained nursery and primary schools( 4)  Other maintained and private, voluntary and independent providers  Total 4-year-olds 
			 1997 920 n/a 920 n/a n/a (5, 6)2,100 
			 1998 980 n/a 980 n/a n/a (5, 6)2,000 
			 1999 1,000 n/a 1,000 n/a n/a (5, 6)2,000 
			 2000 1,000 (7)520 1,500 n/a n/a (5, 6)2,000 
			 2001 930 (7)550 1,500 n/a n/a (5, 6)1,900 
			 2002 940 (7)620 1,600 1,700 (5)230 1,900 
			 2003 990 (7)690 1,700 1,600 (8)240 1,900 
			 2004 870 (9)730 1,600 1,700 (10)240 1,900 
			 2005 900 (9)650* 1,500 1,500 (10)220 1,700 
			 2006 920 (9)650 1,600 1,500 (10)300 1,800 
			 2007 990 (9)710 1,700 1,500 (10)240 1,700 
			 2008 1,000 (9)690 1,700 1,600 (10)220 1,800 
			 (1 )A place is equal to five or more sessions and can be filled by more than one child. (2) Figures are rounded to the nearest 100 if they exceed 1,000 and to the nearest 10 otherwise. (3 )Headcount of children aged three at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the School Census. (4 )Headcount of children aged four at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the School Census. (5 )Part-time equivalent number of children aged four at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Nursery Education Grant data collection exercise. (6 )For the years 1997 to 2001, four-year-old sub-national figures from the Nursery Education Grant data collection exercise can not be disaggregated between the maintained and private, voluntary and independent sectors. (7 )Part-time equivalent number of children aged three at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Nursery Education Grant data collection exercise. (8 )Part-time equivalent number of children aged four at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Early Years Census supplementary data collection exercise and the School Census. (9 )Part-time equivalent number of children aged three at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Early Years Census and the School Census. (10 )Part-time equivalent number of children aged four at 31 December in the previous calendar year from the Early Years Census and the School Census. 
		
	
	The latest figures on early education places for three and four-year-olds in England were published in Statistical First Release 12/2008 Provision for children under five years of age in EnglandJanuary 2008 in May, which is available on my Department's website
	www.dfes.gov.uk/rsgateway/.

Pupils: Intimidation

Jo Swinson: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families what research his Department has conducted into the effect of stress caused by bullying in schools.

Kevin Brennan: holding answer 21 July 2008
	We are not aware of any specific research into the effect of stress caused by bullying in schools. However, we are aware that many external studies link being bullied to outcomes such as anxiety, depression, lowered self-esteem and, in extreme cases, suicide. The Anti-Bullying Alliance (ABA) has carried out a number of research projects on behalf of my Department around various aspects of bullying, and the findings have informed our wider work to prevent and tackle this happening in schools. My Department has also recently tendered for research into the effectiveness of our anti-bullying strategies.

School Meals

David Laws: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families which local authorities had data included in the School Food Trust Survey of school meal up-take 2007-08 for  (a) primary and  (b) secondary schools; and if he will make a statement.

Kevin Brennan: I refer the hon. Member to the statement provided to the House on 10 July 2008,  Official Report, columns 80-82WS, entitled The take up of school meals 2007-08 and future support for Improving take up.
	All 150 local authorities (LAs) in England were asked to provide information about both primary and secondary school take up for 2007-08 as well as more general information on factors influencing changes in take up in the previous year. Responses have been received from 109.
	The data were collected 'in confidence', with the promise that findings would be reported at no lower than regional level. LAs were asked, however, if they would be willing for data collected to be used to identify their individual LA. Of the 109 LAs that responded, the following said that they would:
	Barking and Dagenham
	Bath and North East Somerset
	Bexley
	Birmingham
	Blackpool
	Bolton
	Bracknell Forest
	Bradford
	Brighton and Hove
	Bristol, City of
	Bury
	Calderdale
	Cheshire
	Coventry
	Cumbria
	Derbyshire
	Devon
	Doncaster
	Dudley
	Durham
	Ealing
	East Riding of Yorkshire
	East Sussex
	Essex
	Greenwich
	Halton
	Hampshire
	Haringey
	Hartlepool
	Havering
	Herefordshire
	Hillingdon
	Isle of Wight
	Islington
	Kingston upon Thames
	Kirklees
	Knowsley
	Lambeth
	Leeds
	Leicester
	Lewisham
	Lincolnshire
	Liverpool
	Luton
	Manchester
	Middlesbrough
	Newham
	Norfolk
	North Lincolnshire
	North Somerset
	North Yorkshire
	Northumberland
	Nottingham
	Nottinghamshire
	Plymouth
	Redbridge
	Rochdale
	Rotherham
	Salford
	Sefton
	Sheffield
	Shropshire
	Solihull
	Staffordshire
	Stockton-on-Tees
	Stoke-on-Trent
	Sunderland
	Sutton
	Swindon
	Tameside
	Tower Hamlets
	Trafford
	Wakefield
	Waltham Forest
	Wandsworth
	Warrington
	Warwickshire
	West Sussex
	Westminster
	Wigan
	Wiltshire
	Wokingham
	Worcestershire

Schools: Crimes of Violence

Brian Jenkins: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families what steps he is taking to reduce the incidence of violence against teachers in schools.

Kevin Brennan: Violence to school staff is rare but any incident is one too many. We have therefore made it clear that head teachers may permanently exclude pupils for violence, even for a first offence. We are also helping to reduce the risk of violence through a national programme to strengthen schools' capacity to manage pupils' behaviour. This includes giving schools access to specialist training and advice, strengthening their legal powers to discipline pupils, reaffirming their legal power to use reasonable force to restrain pupils, giving them legal power to search pupils for weapons and encouraging them to form Safer School Partnerships that base police officers in schools. Sir Alan Steer is advising on how the programme could be further strengthened.

UN Convention on the Rights of the Child

Andrew Dismore: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families how the Government plans to engage with  (a) the Northern Ireland Human Rights Commission,  (b) the Equality and Human Rights Commission and  (c) the Scottish Human Rights Commission in formulating a response to the UN Committee on the Rights of the Child's concluding observations.

Beverley Hughes: The UK Government and devolved Administrations will seek dialogues with a range of organisations, including the respective Human Rights Commissions, when considering the UN Committee on the Rights of the Child's Concluding Observations.

Adult Education: North Yorkshire

Anne McIntosh: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what assessment he has made of the adequacy of provision for adult education in North Yorkshire.

Bill Rammell: The Learning and Skills Council (LSC) have responsibility for ensuring there is sufficient, good quality provision for post-16 learners in further education (FE) delivered by FE colleges and providers in England. Quality in North Yorkshire is assured through the same assessment processes as all other areas of England in that all further education (FE) colleges and providers are subject to inspection by Ofsted.
	In line with the Learning and Skills Council (LSC) national approach to commissioning, regional LSCs will discuss with each FE college and provider their contribution to the delivery of skills for employability and further progression in learning in line with Government priorities. The performance of FE colleges and providers in delivering LSC-funded FE provision is also considered against the published national minimum levels of performance.
	These discussions will inform decisions on whether the range of provision available in an area is sufficient and of good quality, and whether there is a need to tender for new provision, expand existing provision and/or replace poor quality provision. The offer to all local citizens, particularly those in disadvantaged neighbourhoods is central to these decisions.

Apprentices

Stephen Williams: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills pursuant to the answer of 5 June 2008,  Official Report, column 1131W, on apprentices, what the reasons are for the planning assumption that the number of adult apprenticeship starts will reduce between 2009-10 and 2010-11; and if he will make a statement.

David Lammy: The adult apprenticeship start figures are converted from the planned figures used for the 2008-09 Learning and Skills Council (LSC) grant letter and LSC statement of priorities. These figures were produced before the apprenticeships review and were on a different basis from the starts measure that is now the agreed measure following that review. For the 2009-10 LSC grant letter and LSC statement of priorities, due to be published later this year, we will be revisiting the planned figures for apprenticeships on the agreed basis of starts and ensuring that our apprenticeship trajectory matches the ambition that we set out in world-class apprenticeships. We will continue to provide funding to expand the Apprenticeship programme to meet the needs of both young people and adults.

Apprentices: Construction

Jon Trickett: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what steps he plans to take to ensure that more apprenticeship placements are made available for young people wishing to acquire skills in the construction industry.

David Lammy: World-class Apprenticeships (WCA) announced a package of measures designed to boost capacity and make it easier for employers to take on apprentices A construction Taskforce is working directly with the Learning and Skills Council to increase the numbers of apprenticeships in the sector. Last year saw the highest number of starts, 21,000, in construction for four years.
	Funding for apprenticeships will increase by almost a quarter between 2007/08 and 2010/11 to over 1 billion.
	We are also working to ensure major developments such as the Olympic and Paralympic games include opportunities for apprenticeships. Already the Olympic Development Authority (ODA) has committed to get at least 2,000 people in apprenticeships and work placements (up to 2012) at the Olympic park and other venues that the ODA is working on or building.
	A national apprenticeship service (NAS), announced in the WCA, will have a particular focus of giving young people the opportunities to explore 'non-traditional' areas, for instance, potential female apprentices will be encouraged to look at trades concerned with construction and the built environment.

Computers: Graduates

Nigel Evans: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what recent assessment he has made of the effect on the economy of trends in numbers of computer science graduates in England.

Bill Rammell: holding answer 21 July 2008
	There have been on average some 18,500 computer science first degree qualifiers over the five years to 2006-07. While levels in 2006-07 are lower than in the past five years it is too early to draw conclusions about trends. The Labour Force Survey shows that adults with a degree in computing have the 4th highest employment rates.
	I am encouraged by the range of contact currently taking place between the Sector Skills Council (e-skills UK). The Higher Education Funding Council for England and the higher education sector to ensure their IT and computing courses continue to meet the needs of industry. The ITMB degree framework helps prepare undergraduates for the changing role of the IT professional by providing them with the technology and business skills employers need. E-skills are also supporting activity in schools such as the 14-19 Diploma in Information Technology and Computer Clubs for Girls which improve the information available to pupils and can help drive demand for computer science courses.

Computers: Graduates

Nigel Evans: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills how many students at UK universities graduated with degrees in  (a) computer science,  (b) mathematics and  (c) physics in each of the last five years.

Bill Rammell: holding answer 14 July 2008
	The latest available information is given in the table. Comparable figures for the 2007-08 academic year will be available in January 2009.
	
		
			  Number of First Degree Qualifiers( 1)  in Computer Science, Mathematical Sciences and Physics: UK higher education institutions( 2) 
			  Subject of study  2002-03  2003-04  2004-05  2005-06  2006-07 
			 Computer Science(3) 18,240 20,010 19,775 18,495 16,255 
			 Mathematical Sciences(4) 5,100 5,150 4,990 5,260 5,385 
			 Physics 2,205 2,180 2,225 2,345 2,255 
			 (1) Figures cover qualifiers of all domiciles and all modes of study. (2) Figures exclude those qualifying from the Open University due to inconsistencies in their method of recording subject of study over the time period. (3) Computer Science as a subject area includes the following principal subjects: Computer Science, Information Systems, Software Engineering, Artificial Intelligence, Others in Computing Science. (4) Mathematical Sciences as a subject area includes the following principal subjects: Mathematics, Operational Research, Statistics, Others in Mathematical and Computing Sciences, Others  Mathematical Sciences, Balanced Combination of Maths Sciences and informatics.  Note:  Figures have been rounded to the nearest five.  Source:  Higher Education Statistics Agency (HESA) Student Record. 
		
	
	The STEM programme aims to increase the number of young people taking up post-16 qualifications in the area of STEM, which includes ICT. By ensuring that more young people are going into mathematics and the sciences at post-16 we are enabling more people to take up degrees and other HE qualifications in ICT and computing fields.
	64 per cent. of computing graduates work in STEM jobs. This is slightly higher than all STEM graduates (48 per cent.), which suggests that either there is slightly higher demand for computing graduates so that computing graduates are more likely to have the right skills that employers are looking for than other STEM graduates. Five per cent. of e-skills employers have skills-shortage vacancies, the same as the UK average. There are still some 36 per cent. of computing graduates or 73,000 individuals not working in a STEM job, who could be used to overcome any excess demand.
	I am encouraged by the range of contact currently taking place between the Sector Skills Council (e-skills UK). The Higher Education Funding Council for England and the higher education sector to ensure their IT and computing courses continue to meet the needs of industry. The ITMB degree framework helps prepare undergraduates for the changing rote of the IT professional by providing them with the technology and business skills employers need. E-skills are also supporting activity in schools such as the 14-19 Diploma in Information Technology and Computer Clubs for Girls which improve the information available to pupils and can help drive demand for computer science courses.

Departmental Marketing

Pete Wishart: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what the cost was of  (a) internet and website design and hosting,  (b) print media design and  (c) broadcast media of each of his Department's public information campaigns since 1997.

David Lammy: The Department for innovation, Universities and Skills was created as a result of Machinery of Government changes in June 2007.
	 (a) The costs for website setup, design and ongoing maintenance and content updates in the financial year 2007/08 was 89,532.16. The cost of web hosting is unknown as it is wrapped up in a larger contract, but would very roughly estimate this to be no more than 25,000 pa.
	 (b) We are unable to provide costs for print media design as there is no central record of leaflets, reports or printed material for a public audience. Print media design is commissioned by many teams within the Department and it would be disproportionate in cost to gather this information in detail.
	 (c) The costs for broadcast media for the public information campaigns since the Departments inception are 1,520,004.80.

Departmental Written Questions

David Simpson: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills how long on average his Department took to answer  (a) ordinary written and  (b) named day questions in each of the last three years.

David Lammy: Information on the average number of days taken to answer parliamentary questions is not readily available in the format requested and could be provided only at disproportionate cost.

Dudley College

Ian Austin: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what assessment he has made of the findings of the recent Ofsted report on Dudley College.

Bill Rammell: I am delighted to say that Dudley College of Technology was graded good for overall effectiveness in its recent inspection by Ofsted. I commend the college on the significant improvements they have made since their previous Ofsted inspection in February 2007.
	These results show that with strong leadership and management, and good quality teaching, colleges can greatly improve their performance to meet the needs of learners and employers and play a key role in the local community they serve. I would like to congratulate the staff and students at Dudley College of Technology on this transformation.
	The improvements made by Dudley College of Technology demonstrate that the measures we introduced in the FE Reform White Paper to tackle and eliminate under performance, are clearly working.

Education: Employment

John Battle: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what his latest estimate is of the number of adults who after taking part in publicly-financed education courses found work with salaries between  (a) 10,000 to 15,000,  (b) 15,000 to 20,000,  (c) 20,000 to 25,000 and  (d) above 25,000.

Bill Rammell: The information requested is not available. However, DIUS does publish information on Labour Force survey estimates of hourly earnings according to highest qualification held in the Statistical First Release, Highest Qualification Held by Adults: England 2007 available at:
	http://www.dcsf.gov.uk/rsgatewav/DB/SFR/s000798/index.shtml.
	Information on the salaries of newly qualified first degree graduates (based on their employment situation six months after graduation) is collected and published by the Higher Education Statistics Agency (HESA), but the information is only available for around 50 per cent. of graduates who enter employment. The latest such information is available at
	http://www.hesa.ac.uk/index.php/content/view/1237/161/.

Education: Prisons

Simon Hughes: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what procedures are in place to ensure inmates are able to continue and complete study courses following  (a) (i) managed and (ii) involuntary moves by HM Prison Service to other detention facilities,  (b) the granting of early release and  (c) the completion of custodial sentences.

David Lammy: holding answer 21 July 2008
	The Learning and Skills Council contracts with providers to deliver learning and skills to prisoners. Transferring prisoners are able to continue learning with the provider at the receiving establishment, and it is a contractual requirement on the provider to try to ensure that learning can be continued on release.

Education: Prisons

Simon Hughes: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what steps he has taken to improve completion rates for inmates undertaking study courses.

David Lammy: holding answer 21 July 2008
	The Learning and Skills Council took responsibility for learning and skills in prisons, and let new contracts through a refreshed set of providers in summer 2006. The specification for those contracts put in place a detailed requirement for the delivery of learning that has led to 55 per cent. of learners in the 2006/07 academic year completing their learning aims, which represents a significant achievement at a time when the Prison Service is facing real challenges in terms of overcrowding and the consequent need to move prisoners around the estate. The Learning and Skills Council is developing arrangements, including a new specification, for the successor contracts it will let for August 2009 that will incorporate payment arrangements to reward learner outcomes.

Education: Prisons

Simon Hughes: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what steps he has taken to improve levels of educational attainment among the prison population in England and Wales.

David Lammy: holding answer 21 July 2008
	The Government have put in place a significant programme of action to improve levels of educational attainment among the prison population in England and Wales. Funding for offender learning has more than trebled since the predecessors of the Department for Innovation, Universities and Skills and the Department for Children, Schools and Families took responsibility for offender learning in 2001 and is expected to exceed 170 million in 2008-09. We have introduced Heads of Learning and Skills in prisons to take day to day responsibility for managing the learning and skills. Prisons are now subject to the same inspection arrangements as the rest of the further education sector, delivered by Ofsted and Estyn. Inspection outcomes are improving and the proportion of failed inspections are falling to similar levels as those in community adult learning settings. In England we have given responsibility for planning and funding offender learning to the Learning and Skills Council, operating collaboratively with the National Offender Management Service in commissioning the service to be delivered. Since the Learning and Skills Council took responsibility for the service, participation rates have risen from an estimated 36 per cent. in the 2006-07 academic year to 39 per cent. in the August 2007 to May 2008. Similar arrangements apply in Wales, with the Director of Offender Management Wales playing a significant role in planning the service.
	We are continuing to drive forward the agenda of attainment and employment through the programme of activity set out in 'Reducing Re-offending Through Skills and Employment: Next Steps' (December 2006) with two test bed regions (the west midlands and the east of England) trialling the plans set out in the document, ready for implementation from summer 2009.

Educational Psychology: Training

Stephen Williams: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills whether trainee educational psychologists are expected to pay for their transport costs when visiting pupils during their placements; and if he will make a statement.

Kevin Brennan: I have been asked to reply.
	Detailed arrangements for the support offered to individual trainee educational psychologists (EPs) are matters for local determination between the host local authority, the trainee and training provider.
	Under the current postgraduate grant scheme for educational psychology training places, administered by the Children's Workforce Development Council (CWDC), trainees receive a bursary of 14,500 (14,900 with London weighting) in their the first year. Arrangements vary for years two and three depending on what has been agreed regionally.
	Where trainees are employed as trainee EPs, they are entitled to the same services and allowances as any other employees of the local authority, including being able to claim back expenses. Where trainees are on bursaries, local authorities are not necessarily bound by the same obligations. Some training providers are making provision to cover trainees' expenses, up to a fixed amount, where they receive a bursary.
	The CWDC will keep the current arrangements under review in the light of operational experience.

Further Education: Halifax

Linda Riordan: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what assessment he has made of the performance of further education colleges in Halifax in the last 12 months.

Bill Rammell: Ofsted is the body responsible for assessing the quality of provision in further education colleges. Ofsted inspected Calderdale College in November 2007 and published its judgment that the provision is satisfactory in January 2008. In addition, the LSC as part of its commissioning process discusses and reviews performance with all providers. As a matter of course, West Yorkshire LSC will be conducting this activity with Calderdale College on an annual basis.

Further Education: Student Wastage

David Simpson: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what research he has  (a) commissioned and  (b) evaluated on the reasons why students in further education who failed to complete their courses did so in the last three years.

Bill Rammell: Our research shows that reasons for leaving from FE courses are quite disparate (reflecting the wide range of learners, courses, and learning modes). The most common main reason for leaving FE was that the course was not what the learner wanted to do after all.
	We will be establishing a universal adult advancement and careers service through the merger of nextstep and learndirect-advice to be fully operational from autumn 2010 which will help individuals make the choices on learning that are right for them.
	We want to make sure that we are meeting the needs of learners. It is encouraging that success rates have increased in FErising year-on-year since 2000/01 to 78 per cent. in 2006/07, and that over 90 per cent. of learners are satisfied with their overall learning experience.
	Full details of the research can be found in the regular National Learner Satisfaction survey undertaken by the Learning and Skills Council
	http://research,lsc.gov.uk/LSC+Research/published/learner-satisfaction/
	and the survey of early leavers from further education and wok-based teaming courses
	http://www.dfes.gov.uk/research/data/uploadfiles/RR849.pdf
	The Learning and Skills Council have commissioned a further two projects;
	(1) Learner journeys on several different Learner Support programmes.
	(2) Understanding the needs of disadvantaged learners and non learners.

Higher Education

John Hayes: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what progress has been made on including UK material in the best practice compendium on the modernisation of universities, as referred to in section 2.3 of EU document 2008/C 86/01.

Bill Rammell: The UK has been actively engaged in developing the Compendium and has contributed several examples of best practice to it. The Compendium will be a web-based tool and it will allow access for policy makers, practitioners and the wider public to search and download information. It is currently being tested and is expected to go live by the end of this month.

Higher Education: Admissions

Ian Lucas: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills 
	(1)  how many students began undergraduate courses in universities in England in each of the last five years;
	(2)  how many students domiciled in England began undergraduate courses in universities in Wales in each of the last five years;
	(3)  how many students domiciled in Wales began undergraduate courses in universities in England in each of the last five years.

Bill Rammell: The latest available information is given in the tables. Table 1 covers entrants to full-time undergraduate courses, and table 2 covers entrants to part-time courses.
	Comparable figures for the 2007/08 academic year will be available in January 2009.
	
		
			  Table 1: Entrants to full-time undergraduate courses by domicile and location of institution English and Welsh higher education institutionsAcademic years 2002/03 to 2006/07 
			 Of which : 
			  Academic year  Location of institution  All domiciles  England  Wales 
			 2002/03 England 344,235 287.485 6,400 
			  Wales 24,355 9,080 12,705 
			 2003/04 England 350,410 289,885 6,410 
			  Wales 25.200 9.095 12,965 
			 2004/05 England 354,605 293,700 6,190 
			  Wales 24,365 9,105 12,180 
			 2005/06 England 372,710 312,110 6,365 
			  Wales 24,780 9,510 12,160 
			 2006/07 England 359,355 296,725 5,460 
			  Wales 25,565 8,735 13.515 
			  Note: Figures are based on a HESA standard registration population and have been rounded to the nearest 5.  Source: Higher Education Statistics Agency (HESA). 
		
	
	
		
			  Table 2: Entrants to part-time undergraduate courses by domicile and location of institution English and Welsh higher education institutionsAcademic years 2002/03 to 2006/07 
			 Of which: 
			  Academic year  Location of institution  All domiciles  England  Wales 
			 2002/03 England 261.070 236,405 3,385 
			  Wales 21,100 2,400 17,450 
			 2003/04 England 272,185 243,970 3,820 
			  Wales 21,180 2,475. 17,485 
			 2004/05(1) England 266,770 237.295 3,495 
			  Wales 22,575 2,600 18,325 
			 2005/06 England 284,965 249.660 4.280 
			  Wales 22,800 2,935 17,610 
			 2006/07 England 287,215 249,125 4,890 
			  Wales 22,890 2,605 17,560 
			 (1 )The increase in entrants between 2004/05 and 2005/06 may be greater than in reality as a consequence of a problem identified with data submitted by the Open University (OU) in the 2004/05 academic year.  Note: Figures are based on a HESA standard registration population and have been rounded to the nearest 5.  Source: Higher Education Statistics Agency (HESA). 
		
	
	Higher education is one of the most important investments a young person can make as graduates earn, on average, far more than people with A-levels or similar who do not go in to higher education. Over the working life, the average graduate will earn comfortably over 100,000 more, after tax and in today's valuation, than a similar individual who completed their education with two or more A-levels.
	In recent years we have reformed student finance, offering improvements to both full-time and part-time students. For new entrants to full-time higher education in 2008/09 we have increased the means-testing threshold below which students are entitled to a full maintenance grant up from 17,910 for entrants in 2007/08 to 25,000. The threshold for a partial grant will increase from 38,330 for entrants in 2007/08 to 60,005. These thresholds relate to household income. This will mean that one third of all eligible students in England entering higher education In the academic year 2008/09 are expected to be entitled to a full non-repayable grant worth 2,835 and another one third are expected to be entitled to a partial grant of between 50 and 2,835. Due to these reforms, by 2011, the number of students receiving some level of grant will increase by around 100,000. As part of this change, an extra 50,000 students will receive a full grant.
	In 2006 grants towards part time students' fees were increased by 27 per cent. with an additional 40 million of institutional funding to Higher Education Institutions to encourage participation from the most under-represented groups.
	Latest figures from UCAS, covering applicants to full-time undergraduate courses only, show that, after the small downturn in 2006, applicants who were accepted for entry in 2007 increased. For accepted applicants from the UK, figures show a rise of 5.5 per cent. to 364,500, with those from England showing a 6.1 per cent. rise to 307,000, the highest ever, and those from Wales up 1.3 per cent.
	Latest figures for students applying for entry in 2008, show as at the end of June, applicants to full-time undergraduate courses show a year-on-year rise of 6.5 per cent. with those from England up by 7.3 per cent. and those from Wales up by 4.9 per cent.

Higher Education: Admissions

David Willetts: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills how many and what proportion of 18 year olds who had been previously identified as gifted and talented went on to higher education in each of the last three years.

Bill Rammell: The gifted and talented flag was not introduced into the National Pupil Database until 2006 and we do not yet have data on HE destinations that can be linked to this flag.
	The National Academy for Gifted and Talented Youth (NAGTY) catered for the national top 5 per cent. of 11 to 19-year-olds from 2002 to 2007. It has now been replaced by the Young Gifted and Talented (YG and T) Learner Academy.
	NAGTY's 2006 Student Exit Survey Questionnaire showed that, of those completing the questionnaire:
	87 per cent. said they went straight on to continue their education at university;
	8 per cent. were taking a gap year before going into higher education.
	The Government remain committed to widening participation in higher education and to securing fair access for gifted and talented students. It is an economic as well as a social imperative that everyone who can benefit from higher education has the opportunity to do so. Widening participation is about spotting and nurturing talent, with schools, colleges and universities working together to ensure that all those with the potential and merit to benefit from higher education are able to do so.

Qualifications: Young People

Stephen Williams: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what proportion of 16-year-olds without a Level 2 qualification are in full-time education; and what proportion  (a) achieved a Level 2 and remained in full-time education and  (b) achieved a Level 2 and left full-time education in the latest period for which figures are available.

David Lammy: Estimates of the proportions of 16-year-olds attaining different levels of qualifications who continued in full-time education were published on 26 June 2008 in a Statistical Bulletin, Youth Cohort Study and Longitudinal Study of Young People in England: The Activities and Experiences of 16-Year-Olds: England 2007. The bulletin relates to young people who completed their compulsory education in 2006 and reached 16 during the 2005/06 academic year.
	51 per cent. of those without a level 2 qualification remained in full-time education; 88 per cent. of those who achieved a level 2 remained in full-time education and 12 per cent. of those who achieved a level 2 left full-time education.

Student Unions: Equality

John Mann: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what provisions of legislation on race relations govern the activities of student unions; and if he will make a statement.

Bill Rammell: The Race Relations Act 1976 imposes obligations on student unions in relation to their roles as employers, providers of goods, facilities and services and in relation to the disposal and management of their premises. It also places them under obligations as regards their decisions in relation to applications for membership and their treatment of their members, if they have a membership of 25 or more people.
	Student unions are also subject to supervision by higher education institutions (HEIs), under section 22 of the Education Act 1994, who have a duty to:
	take such steps as are reasonably practicable to secure that any students' union for students at the establishment operates in a fair and democratic manner and is accountable for its finances.

Student Wastage

David Willetts: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills how many students dropped out of each UK university in each of the last 10 years, broken down by subject studied.

Bill Rammell: Non-completion rates are not broken down by degree subject However a sector-wide non-continuation rate is provided for each year, which is broken down by subject of study. The non-continuation rate is the proportion of entrants to full-time first degree courses who are no longer in higher education after one year of study. The rates for young entrants are shown in table 1. Information on the actual numbers not continuing in HE has not been published.
	
		
			  Table 1: Percentage of young entrants to full-time first degree courses who are no longer in HE in after one year of studyUK higher education institutions academic years 1999/2000 to 2005/06 
			  Percentage 
			  Degree subject  1999/2000  2000/01  2001/02  2002/03  2003/04  2004/05  2005/06 
			 Medicine, dentistry and veterinary science 2.0 2.0 2.4 1.8 2.0 1.9 1.6 
			 Subjects allied to medicine 6.3 6.0 5.9 6.4 7.7 6.8 6.5 
			 Biological sciences(1) (1) (1) (1) (1) 7.3 6.8 6.7 
			 Physical sciences(1) 6.9 6.0 6.1 7.1 6.1 6.0 7.8 
			 Agriculture and related subjects 6.8 7.0 11.4 7.5 8.3 8.0 5.7 
			 Mathematical sciences(2) (2) (2) (2) (2) 5.5 5.3 4.8 
			 Computer sciences(2) 9.8 8.0 8.4 9.4 10.3 10.3 10.5 
			 Engineering and technology 10.1 9.0 8.9 10.0 10.1 9.1 8.5 
			 Architecture, building, planning 9.6 8.0 10.2 11.1 10.0 8.3 7.6 
			 Social studies(3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 7.2 6.9 7.0 
			 Law(3) 6.9 6.0 6.4 7.0 6.2 5.5 5.9 
			 Librarianship, information sciences(4) (4) (4) (4) n/a n/a n/a n/a 
			 Business and administrative studies(4,5) 6.9 8.0 8.2  8.8 8.2 8.4 
			 Mass communications and documentation(5) n/a n/a n/a 8.8 8.5 8.6 8.5 
			 Humanities(6) (6) (6) (6) n/a n/a n/a n/a 
			 Languages(6,7) 5.9 5.0 5.7  6.3 5.7 5.8 
			 Historical and philosophical studies(7) n/a n/a n/a 6.3 5.9 5.0 5.1 
			 Creative arts and design 8.7 8.0 8.3 8.2 8.4 8.1 8.0 
			 Education 8.6 8.0 8.1 8.0 7.5 7.6 7.3 
			 Combined subjects 8.8 8.0 8.2 14.3 13.5 14.3 13.8 
			 All subjects 7.8 7.0 7.3 7.8 7.7 7.2 7.1 
			 n/a = Not applicable (1) One figure was provided for Biological and Physical Sciences until 2003/04. (2) One figure was provided for Mathematical and Computer Sciences until 2003/04. (3) One figure was provided for Social Studies and Law until 2003/04. (4) One figure was provided for Librarianship. information sciences and Business and administrative studies until 2002/03. (5) One figure was provided for Business and administrative studies and Mass communications and documentation in 2002/03, (6 )One figure was provided for Languages and Humanities until 2002/03. (7) One figure was provided for Languages and Historical and Philosophical Studies in 2002/03.  Notes: 1. Figures for 2000/01 are only available to the nearest integer. 2. There is a break in the time series between academic years 2001/02 and 2002/03 because the subjects' JACS coding was changed in 2002/03.  Source: Performance Indicators in Higher Education, published by the Higher Education Statistics Agency (HESA) 
		
	
	Table 2, which has been placed in the Library of the House, shows the proportion of full-time first degree entrants who were projected to neither gain an award nor transfer for each UK HEI. Information on the actual numbers projected to neither obtain an award nor transfer has not been published.
	Student retention rates in this country compare very well internationally. The UK rank fifth in the OECD for first degree completion rates, out of 23 countries who report data in this area. A university education is now open to more students than ever before and the Government are totally committed to providing opportunities for all people to achieve their potential and to maximise their talent.

Students: Finance

Sarah Teather: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what the maximum amount of  (a) grant and  (b) loan available to students completing (i) clinical and (ii) research positions during a mandatory sandwich year forming part of an undergraduate degree course is.

Bill Rammell: Entitlement to maintenance loan and grant support for students on a sandwich course placement year depends upon the periods of full-time study during the academic year in question.
	Generally, students are not entitled to grants for living costs in respect of an academic year of a sandwich course in which periods of full-time study aggregate to less than 10 weeks, unless the periods of work experience constitute unpaid service. They are, however, eligible for a non means tested loan for living costsin 2008-09 the maximum amount available to most students will be 2,265.
	However, students on certain specified unpaid placements in the public or voluntary sectors (including unpaid clinical and research positions in public health and local authorities) are potentially entitled to grants for living costs of up to 2,835 (up to 1,000 if they entered higher education in 2004/05 or 2005/06), subject to means- testing; and for other grants for dependants and for travel. Students on such unpaid placements will be eligible for the full amount of loans for living costs, also subject to means-testing and place of residence; in 2008/09 the maximum loan available to most students will be 4,625 (6,475 for students living away from home and studying in London).
	Students who entered HE in or after 2006 and who are subject to the variable fee regime can take out a non means tested fee loan of up to 3,145 in 2008/09 if any periods of full-time study in the academic year in question aggregate to more than 10 weeks, or 1,570 If any such periods aggregate to less than 10 weeks.
	Students who entered HE before 1 September 2006 and who consequently are not subject to the variable fee regime will be liable for a tuition fee contribution of 1,255 if any periods of full-time study aggregate to more than 10 weeks, or a contribution of up to 610 if any such periods aggregate to less than 10 weeks. Such students can apply for a means-tested fee grant to cover their contribution, and can take out a non means-tested fee contribution loan to cover any shortfall in their fee grant.

Students: Government Assistance

Jim Cunningham: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what steps the Government  (a) has taken and  (b) plans to take to provide assistance to students who have been estranged from their families.

Bill Rammell: holding answer 9 July 2008
	 The Education (Student Support) Regulations provide for students who are proven to be estranged from their parents to be treated as independent students for the purposes of assessing their entitlement to higher education student support. We have no plans to change the way in which the assessment of such students is carried out.
	Students who claim to be estranged from their parents are required to provide sufficient evidence for their local authority (LA) to determine that the estrangement does exist and is permanent. For each subsequent year for which such a student applies for support; the LA has to satisfy itself that the estrangement still persists.
	The financial assessment for single independent students (i.e. they do not have a husband, wife, civil partner or cohabiting partner of either sex) is based on the student's own income only. The core student support package for such a student with an income of up to 18,360 (or up to 25,000 for new students starting their studies from 2008/09) studying outside London comprises: a non means-tested tuition fee loan of up to 3,145; a means-tested maintenance grant of 2,835; and a loan for maintenance of up to 4,625. Students who are in receipt of the full maintenance grant and who are being charged the maximum 3,145 tuition fee are also eligible for an institutional bursary of at least 310.
	Extra support is available for disadvantaged students trough non means-tested Disabled Students Allowances and means-tested Childcare grant, Adult Dependant Grant and Parents Learning Allowance, in addition, students may also be able to apply to their university or college for support from its Access to Learning Fund for students experiencing particular financial hardship.

Students: Loans

Vincent Cable: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills when the new interest rates payable on student loans to be repaid over the year from 1 September 2007 to 31 August 2008 were set by the Student Loans Company (SLC); and  (a) when and  (b) in what form those rates were communicated to those graduates and current students who had taken out loans through the SLC.

Bill Rammell: holding answer 9 July 2008
	The student loan interest rate for the year from 1 September 2007 to 31 August 2008 was confirmed by officials during August 2007 as the rate to apply for the forthcoming academic year for both types of student loan.
	In accordance with the requirements of the Consumer Credit Act 1974, the Student Loans Company (SLC) publishes details of the forthcoming change in the interest rate payable for pre-1998 Mortgage Style (MS) Student Loans before the new rate takes effect on 1 September each year. There is no similar requirement for advance notification for the current Income Contingent Repayment (ICR) Student Loans which have a low interest rate exemption from arrangements governing consumer credit agreements. ICR statements are issued in September each year for those borrowers whose loans are not yet in repayment. For ICR borrowers who are in repayment, statements are issued after receipt of a file from HMRC. Thus, there is no specific timescale for the issue of these statements but, for the majority, these are issued between September and December.
	However, the SLC publishes notices of the change of interest rates affecting all student loan borrowers in national newspapers before 1 September each year. The change is also published on the SLC's and Government websites.
	Borrowers with MS loans are individually informed of the change by the SLC and private sector debt owners before 1 September. This is important as a change in interest rate for these borrowers changes the payments they are required to make. Borrowers with ICR loans receive notification of the change with their annual statements. While any change in the interest rate applied affects the overall balance of the outstanding loan, it does not alter the income-related repayments of these borrowers.

Students: Work Experience

Stephen Williams: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what estimate he has made of the additional costs incurred by students during non-paid work placements; and if he will make a statement.

Bill Rammell: The range of unpaid placements varies greatly between different courses and different institutions. Information is not available on the costs incurred by students while undertaking a non-paid work placement.
	Generally, students are not entitled to grants for living costs in respect of an academic year of a sandwich course in which periods of full-time study aggregate to less than 10 weeks. They are, however, eligible for a non means-tested loan for living costs. In 2008/09, the maximum amount available to most students will be 2,265.
	However, students on specified unpaid placements in the public or voluntary sectors are potentially entitled to grants for living costs of up to 2,835 (up to 1,000 if they entered higher education in 2004/05 or 2005/06), subject to means-testing; and for other grants for dependants and for travel. Students on these specified unpaid placements will be eligible in 2008/09 for a student loan of up to 4,625 in most cases (up to 6,475 for students living away from home and studying in London), subject to means-testing and place of residence.

Train to Gain Programme

David Willetts: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what proportion of the Train to Gain budget was spent on employers that had been recruited by skills brokers in the most recent year for which figures are available.

David Lammy: holding answer 21 July 2008
	Since it was rolled out nationally from April 2006 the Train to Gain service has engaged almost 93,000 employers and led to over 488,000 employees starting learning funded by LSC. The brokerage service has played an important part in the development of Train to Gain. It has helped engage a high proportion of hard to reach employers, many of which are small businesses. Satisfaction with brokerage is high, at 80 per cent., and recent evaluations show that employers particularly value the local knowledge and impartiality of the brokerage service in helping them source high quality training.
	In the financial year 2006/07 34,000 employers engaged with Train to Gain, of which around half were engaged by skills brokers. The vast majority of employers engaged by brokers will have gone on to receive Train to Gain funding to help them invest in the skills of their employees. Detailed figures are not readily available on the proportion of employees who began learning programmes in Train to Gain who worked for employers engaged by skills brokers.

Animal Experiments

Mike Hancock: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many animals were used for the purposes of marine biotoxins testing in 2006 for (i) PSP toxins and (ii) DSP toxins; what plans she has to replace the use of animals for these purposes; and what plans she has to revoke all existing licences for animal tests for these purposes.

Meg Hillier: We do not hold separate figures for testing for paralytic shellfish poison (PSP) and diarrheic shellfish poison (DSP). However, Table 9 of the Statistics of Scientific Procedures on Living Animals: Great Britain for 2006 records the use of 7,346 mice for the safety evaluation of other foodstuffs. All of these animals were used for marine biotoxin testing.
	Section 5.4 of the Animals (Scientific Procedures) Act requires the Secretary of State to weigh the likely adverse effects on the animals concerned against the benefits likely to accrue as a result of the programme to be specified in the licence. In the case of testing for the presence of marine biotoxins, the benefits of such testing are the protection of public health by ensuring that consumers are not exposed to biotoxins present in molluscan shellfish. In view of this, we have no plan to revoke or amend any project licences that have been granted authorising marine biotoxins testing. However, the Home Office is committed to the replacement of both the PSP and DSP bioassays. To this end, Home Office officials are working closely with the Food Standards Agency, as competent authority for food safety, and those contracted by them to perform routine monitoring for shellfish toxins, to progress replacements.

Antisocial Behaviour Act 2003

David Ruffley: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many prosecutions under the Anti-social Behaviour Act 2003 there have been for  (a) noise,  (b) graffiti and fly-posting and  (c) waste and litter in (i) each local authority and (ii) each police authority, broken down by basic command unit, in each region of England and Wales since January 2008.

Maria Eagle: I have been asked to respond.
	The information requested covering the number of defendants proceeded against at magistrates courts for noise, waste offences and littering in England and Wales for 2006 by police force area and region, are shown in the following tables. Offences of graffiti and fly posting are not separately identifiable from other criminal damage offences (for example vandalism and damaging property) from the information reported to the Ministry of Justice.
	It is not possible to separately identify prosecutions taking place in (i) local authority area and (ii) basic command units within police force areas in England and Wales from the information reported to the Ministry of Justice.
	These data are on the principal offence basis. The figures given in the table on court proceedings relate to persons for whom these offences were the principal offence for which they were dealt with. When a defendant has been found guilty of two or more offences, the offence selected is the one for which the heaviest penalty is imposed. Where the same disposal is imposed for two or more offences, the offence selected is the offence for which the statutory maximum penalty is the most severe.
	Court proceedings data for 2007 will be available in the winter of 2008.
	Court proceedings data for 2008 will be available in the winter of 2009.
	
		
			  N umber of defendants proceeded against at magistrates courts for waste disposal offences, littering and noise offences, by region, and police force area in England and Wales for 2006( 1, 2) 
			   Proceeded against 
			  Offence code  9115  9116  9137  16882  16897 
			  Statute  Environmental Protection Act 1990 Sec.33(8)  Environmental Protection Act 1990 Sec.33(9)  Environmental Protection Act 1990 Sec.33 (6)  Environmental Protection Act 1990 Sec.87  Noise Act 1996 
			  Offence description  Depositing, causing the deposition or permitting the deposition, treating, keeping or disposing of controlled (but not special) waste in or on land without a licence.  Depositing, causing the deposition or permitting the deposition of controlled special waste in or on land without a licence.  Contravening conditions of a waste management licence.  Depositing litter.  Noise exceeds permitted level after service of notice and other summary offences. 
			  Region  
			 North East 32 1 8 273  
			 North West 71 29 62 819  
			 Yorkshire and Humberside 16 2 62 212  
			 East Midlands 23 4 34 302  
			 West Midlands 50 11 22 56  
			 East of England 19 3 38 47 2 
			 London 48 10 121 115 5 
			 South East 60 19 36 51  
			 South West 24  11 56  
			 Wales 17 5 83 91  
			 England and Wales 360 84 477 2,022 7 
		
	
	
		
			   Proceeded against 
			  Statute  Environmental Protection Act 1990 Sec.33(8)  Environmental Protection Act 1990 Sec.33(9)  Environmental Protection Act 1990 Sec.33 (6)  Environmental Protection Act 1990 Sec.87.  Noise Act 1996 
			  Offence description  Depositing, causing the deposition or permitting the deposition, treating, keeping or disposing of controlled (but not special) waste in or on land without a licence.  Depositing, causing the deposition or permitting the deposition of controlled special waste in or on land without a licence.  Contravening conditions of a waste management licence.  Depositing litter.  Noise exceeds permitted level after service of notice and other summary offences. 
			  Force  
			 Avon and Somerset   4 4  
			 Bedfordshire 4  5 10 2 
			 Cambridgeshire 3  3 1  
			 Cheshire 3 6 1 2  
			 Cleveland 3  8 70  
			 Cumbria 1  5 20  
			 Derbyshire 3  8 28  
			 Devon and Cornwall 15  1 20  
			 Dorset 9   15  
			 Durham6  
			 Essex 2 3 17 22  
			 Gloucestershire   3 16  
			 Greater Manchester 49 2 42 668  
			 Hampshire 2 1  6  
			 Hertfordshire   9 3  
			 Humberside 3  9 31  
			 Kent 7 14 16 38  
			 Lancashire 12 21 10 108  
			 Leicestershire 5  4 188  
			 Lincolnshire 10 2 2 18  
			 Merseyside 6   21  
			 Metropolitan Police 48 10 121 115 5 
			 Norfolk 8  4 5  
			 North Yorkshire   7 2  
			 Northamptonshire14  
			 Northumbria 29 1  197  
			 Nottinghamshire 5 2 20 54  
			 South Yorkshire 8  15 79  
			 Staffordshire   2 5  
			 Suffolk 2   6  
			 Surrey 3 1 7 4  
			 Sussex 6 2 4 1  
			 Thames Valley 42 1 9 2  
			 Warwickshire 1 7  1  
			 West Mercia 2  10 19  
			 West Midlands 47 4 10 31  
			 West Yorkshire 5 2 31 100  
			 Wiltshire   3 1  
			 Dyfed-Powys 1  10 15  
			 Gwent   19 15  
			 North Wales 1  6 8  
			 South Wales 15 5 48 53  
			 England and Wales 360 84 477 2,022 7 
			  = Nil (1) These data are on the principal offence basis. (2) Every effort is made to ensure that the figures presented are accurate and complete. However, it is important to note that these data have been extracted from large administrative data systems generated by the courts, and police forces. As a consequence, care should be taken to ensure data collection processes and their inevitable limitations are taken into account when those data are used.

Asylum: Somalia

Paul Holmes: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many Somalian people have been refused asylum in the UK in each of the last  (a) 12 months and  (b) five years; and how many are awaiting a decision on an asylum application.

Liam Byrne: holding answer 21 July 2008
	The following two tables give the most recently published figures available and show the total number of refusals for Somali people, following initial decisions, between April 2007 and March 2008 and for each of the last five years.
	The published figure for asylum applications for Somali people awaiting an initial decision is not available as the figures are based on an overall manual count which is not divided into separate categories.
	Information on asylum is published annually and quarterly. Annual statistics for 2007 and for Q2 2008 will be available on 21 August 2008 from the Library of the House and from the Home Office Research, Development and Statistics Directorate web site at:
	http://www.homeoffice.gov.uk/rds/immigration-asylum-stats.html
	
		
			  Asylum refusals on initial decisions( 1,2)  in the United Kingdom, excluding dependants April 2007 to March 2008 by month, nationals of Somalia 
			   Total refusals 
			  2007  
			 April 65 
			 May 65 
			 June 75 
			 July 60 
			 August 50 
			 September 40 
			 October 55 
			 November 60 
			 December 40 
			   
			  2008  
			 January 45 
			 February 40 
			 March 35 
			 (1) Figures rounded to nearest five. (2) Provisional figures. 
		
	
	
		
			  Asylum refusals( 1)  on initial decisions in the United Kingdom, excluding dependants 2003-07, nationals of Somalia 
			   Total refusals 
			 2003 3,835 
			 2004 2,355 
			 2005 1,000 
			 2006(2) 905 
			 2007(2) 710 
			 (1) Figures rounded to nearest five. (2) Provisional figures.

Asylum: Sudan

Paul Holmes: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many Sudanese people have been refused asylum in the UK in each of the last (a) 12 months and (b) five years; and how many are awaiting a decision on an asylum application.

Liam Byrne: holding answer 21 July 2008
	The accompanying two tables give the most recently published figures available and show the total number of refusals for Sudanese people, following initial decisions, between April 2007 and March 2008 and for each of the last five years.
	The published figure for asylum applications for Sudanese people awaiting an initial decision is not available as the figures are based on an overall manual count which is not divided into separate categories.
	Information on asylum is published annually and quarterly. Annual statistics for 2007 and for Q2 2008 will be available on 21 August 2008 from the Library of the House and from the Home Office Research, Development and Statistics Directorate.
	
		
			  Asylum refusals on initial decisions( 1, 2)  in the United Kingdom, excluding dependants April 2007 - March 2008 by month, nationals of Sudan 
			   Total refusals 
			  2007  
			 April 25 
			 May 20 
			 June 30 
			 July 30 
			 August 20 
			 September 10 
			 October 10 
			 November 15 
			 December 10 
			  2008  
			 January 10 
			 February 10 
			 March 15 
		
	
	
		
			  Asylum refusals( 1)  on initial decisions in the United Kingdom, excluding dependants  2003-07, nationals of Sudan 
			   Total refusals 
			 2003 595 
			 2004 1,305 
			 2005 900 
			 2006(2) 510 
			 2007(2) 300 
			 (1) Figures rounded to nearest 5. (2) Provisional figures

Asylum: Zimbabwe

James Duddridge: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many outstanding applications for asylum there were from Zimbabwean nationals in  (a) Southend and  (b) England and Wales at the end of (i) 2004, (ii) 2005, (iii) 2006 and (iv) 2007.

Liam Byrne: The requested information is unavailable as it is not collated centrally and could be obtained only at disproportionate cost by examination of individual case records.
	Further information on asylum is published annually and quarterly and is available from the Library of the House and from the Home Office Research, Development and Statistics Directorate website at:
	http://www.homeoffice.gov.uk/rds/immigration-asylum-stats.html

Asylum: Zimbabwe

Paul Holmes: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many Zimbabwean people have been refused asylum in the UK in each of the last  (a) 12 months and  (b) five years; and how many are awaiting a decision on an asylum application.

Liam Byrne: holding answer 21 July 2008
	The following two tables give the most recently published figures available and show the total number of refusals for Zimbabwean people, following initial decisions, between April 2007 and March 2008 and for each of the last five years.
	The published figure for asylum applications for Zimbabwean people awaiting an initial decision is not available as the figures are based on an overall manual count which is not divided into separate categories.
	Information on asylum is published annually and quarterly. Annual Statistics for 2007 and for Q2 2008 will be available on 21 August 2008 from the Library of the House and from the Home Office Research, Development and Statistics Directorate web site at:
	http://www.homeoffice.gov.uk/rds/immigration-asylum-stats.html
	
		
			  Asylum refusals( 1)  on initial decisions in the United Kingdom, excluding dependants 2003-07, nationals of Zimbabwe 
			   Total refusals 
			 2003 3,285 
			 2004 2,310 
			 2005 945 
			 2006(2) 1,510 
			 2007(2) 1,155 
			 (1) Figures rounded to nearest five. (2) Provisional figures. 
		
	
	
		
			  Asylum refusals on initial decisions( 1,2)  in the United Kingdom, excluding dependants April 2007 to March 2008 by month, nationals of Zimbabwe 
			   Total refusals 
			  2007  
			 April 95 
			 May 140 
			 June 115 
			 July 135 
			 August 85 
			 September 70 
			 October 80 
			 November 105 
			 December 70 
			   
			  2008  
			 January 80 
			 February 100 
			 March 90 
			 (1) Figures rounded to nearest five. (2) Provisional figures.

Border and Immigration Agency: Correspondence

Clare Short: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department when a reply will be sent to the right hon. Member for Birmingham, Ladywood's letter to the Border and Immigration Agency of 8 April 2008 on behalf of Mamta Devi, Home Office reference number D1104208 and her further letter of 23 May 2008, correspondence reference B18481/8.

Liam Byrne: The UK Border Agency replied to the hon. Member's first letter in a letter received by her on 14 May 2008 and the hon. Member's letter of 23 May was replied to on 17 July 2008.

Borders: Personal Records

Julian Brazier: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many of the companies within the consortium selected to deliver the e-borders programme have had experience of delivering this type of system; and for which governments or companies each has delivered similar programmes.

Liam Byrne: Within the Trusted Borders consortium, Raytheon Systems Ltd., Serco, Accenture, Detica, QinetiQ, Steria and Cap Gemini all have experience in delivering programmes with similar capabilities to e-Borders. These include:
	US Visit, for the US Government;
	Schengen Information System for the European Union; and
	miSense for the Home Office.

Cannabis: Young People

Tim Loughton: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what estimate she has made of the proportion of children  (a) under 14,  (b) 14 to 16 and  (c) between 17 and 18 years old who (i) have tried skunk cannabis and (ii) smoke skunk cannabis at least once a week in each of the last 10 years.

Vernon Coaker: There are two primary sources of statistics on the use of illicit drugs by young people: the British Crime Survey (which covers England and Wales) and the Smoking Drinking and Drug Use Survey Among Young People in England. However, both surveys ask questions about the use of cannabis in general and it is not possible to report separately on the use of skunk.

Crime

Alun Michael: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what standards she has set for  (a) police services,  (b) local authorities and  (c) local crime and disorder reduction partnerships in respect of the methodology for local crime and disorder audits; and what examples of best practice she has identified.

Tony McNulty: Under the Crime and Disorder Act 1998, the Police Service and local authorities are two of the five responsible authorities which comprise Crime and Disorder Reduction Partnerships or Community Safety Partnerships (CSPs) in Wales.
	Following a review of the partnerships provisions of the 1998 Act, the duties to produce three yearly audits and to report annually to the Secretary of State on a partnership's work and progress were repealed in 2007. They were replaced by new statutory requirements in 2007 to introduce minimum standards for partnership working based on six Hallmarks of Effective Partnerships, providing clear statements of the core functions of CDRPs and CSPs. These include producing a strategic assessment identifying local community safety priorities and a partnership plan which sets out the approach for addressing these priorities.
	'Delivering Safer Communities: A Guide to Effective Partnership Working' was issued in September 2007 to support the implementation of the statutory requirements and of the Hallmarks of Effective Partnership. The guidance also contains a number of suggested practice case studies which represent practical solutions to support partnerships meet the statutory requirements.

Crime Prevention: Young People

Mark Harper: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what guidance she has issued to police forces on involving young people in local crime reduction strategies.

Vernon Coaker: Engaging and involving young people in local crime reduction strategies is important, as they are often the group most concerned about crime and are disproportionately victims of crime.
	The Government make it clear in the Policing Green Paper that neighbourhood policing teams should always include young people in their consultations about policing priorities and also make every effort to engage hard to reach groups.
	We encourage all aspects of youth engagement and encourage all police forces authorities and forces to make every effort to consult with and work in partnership with young people, both through adapting existing examples of good practice and developing new ones. We recognise that approaches will differ according to local circumstances and support partnerships between the police and other agencies where there is a coordinated approach to engaging and involving young people.
	Police forces are already engaging positively with young people, for example by way of Safer Schools Partnerships (SSPs). SSPs are a successful mechanism for ensuring joint working between schools and police, with a dedicated police officer attached to a school, and liaising closely with the pupils. There are now about 500 SSPs of one form or another. Evaluations have shown that they are proving effective in improving behaviour and attendance, developing strong and positive relationships between the police and young people, and to help young people develop a sense of being part of the local community.
	The Youth Crime Action Plan (YCAP), published on 15 July, includes a number of additional ways in which the police will be working proactively with and for with young people includes:
	Expansion of Safer Schools Partnerships (see above).
	Increase after school patrols in the locality of the school and transport hubs. This is not only intended to reduce criminal and antisocial behaviour in these areas, but also to help young people feel safer, and able to interact positively with the police.
	Using existing child protection legislation to ensure young people on the street at night are taken to a safe place (Operation Stay Safe).
	Establishing youth forums to address the carrying of knives by young people, including young people who have been directly involved or affected by knife crime.
	The YCAP also includes way of how we need to be responsive and accountable to young people to ensure they are involved in tackling youth crime and decisions that affect them and to improve the relationship between young people and the police. We will also listen to the views of young people themselves, ensuring that they can contribute to developing solutions not just feeling that they are seen as the problem.
	We welcome and encourage youth engagement and will continue to explore ways to achieve this. For example young people are regularly represented on the Steering Group of the YCAP, as their views are very important.

Criminal Records Bureau: Discrimination

David Ruffley: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many claims for discrimination, based on  (a) sex,  (b) race and  (c) sexual orientation, were brought by staff of the Criminal Records Bureau in each of the last five years; and how many in each case were settled (i) in and (ii) out of court.

Meg Hillier: The Criminal Records Bureau (CRB) has had no claims for discrimination on grounds of  (a) sex,  (b) race or  (c) sexual orientation in the last five years.

Criminal Records Bureau: Standards

David Ruffley: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department 
	(1)  in how many cases the Criminal Records Bureau is known to have wrongly reported that a person has a criminal record in each year since its inception; on how many occasions in each year such cases related to offences involving children, broken down by offence; and if she will make a statement;
	(2)  what estimate she has made of the number of Criminal Records Bureau checks which failed to reveal criminal offences that were subsequently found in each year since 2001;
	(3)  how many Criminal Records Bureau checks were found to be incorrect in  (a) 2005,  (b) 2006 and  (c) 2007; and what estimate she has made of the (i) number and (ii) percentage of Criminal Records Bureau records which are incorrect;
	(4)  what measures there are to ensure that  (a) information kept by the Criminal Records Bureau is accurate and up-to-date and  (b) the documentary evidence to support such information is appropriately recorded.

Meg Hillier: All the quality control procedures at the Criminal Records Bureau (CRB) are geared to achieving the highest levels of accuracy. In addition, the CRB carries out a post-disclosure accuracy check that analyses all aspects of the disclosure application and its issue. This check was introduced in 2007 and is based on a statistical sample of disclosure applications and from that sample it can be ascertained that the accuracy rate for 2006-07 is 99.94 per cent. and for 2007-08 is 99.98 per cent. No comparative data are available before these dates.
	The CRB does not collate information about cases related to offences involving children.
	The CRB operates a central database in order to record transactions that occur during the disclosure process, where applicants' personal data provided on an application form are compared against information held by the police, the Department of Health and the Department for Children, Schools and Families. Although the CRB has access to conviction and other information through this process, the police and the other data sources are the data owners of material held on their respective databases and as such are responsible for the accuracy of information held thereon.

Criminal Records: Offences Against Children

David Ruffley: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what procedure the Criminal Records Bureau (CRB) follows in recording allegations of child abuse which have not been proven; how many such allegations are on CRB records; what the procedure for the removal of an unfounded allegation is; and if she will make a statement.

Meg Hillier: The Criminal Records Bureau (CRB) compares applicant details against information held by the police, the Department of Health and the Department for Children, Schools and Families. Although the CRB has access to conviction and other information through this process, the police and the other data sources above are the data owners of material held on their respective databases and as such are responsible for the accuracy of information held thereon. Therefore, the CRB would not record the number of allegations of child abuse which have not been proven. However, the CRB operate a dispute procedure to enable recipients of Disclosure information to dispute the accuracy and relevancy of any information revealed in a Disclosure.

Criminal Records: Wales

Cheryl Gillan: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many people in Wales were incorrectly identified as having criminal records by the Criminal Records Bureau in each year since 2002.

Meg Hillier: The Criminal Records Bureau (CRB) would need to perform a manual trawl, at disproportionate cost, of each application to ascertain whether the postcode falls within Wales, in order to identify how many applicants in Wales have been incorrectly identified in each year since 2002.
	Furthermore, this may not provide a conclusive figure as applicants may live on the borders of England and Wales.

Departmental Information Officers

Jeremy Browne: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how much her Department paid in bonuses to press and communication officers in each of the last 10 years; and what the  (a) highest and  (b) lowest such bonus was in each of those years.

Liam Byrne: Press and communications officers in the Home Office are employed at the Information and Senior Information Officer grades. Total bonus payments are recorded by financial year and the following tables give details of payments made to staff within the Communication Directorate in the past six financial years. There are two types of bonus:
	 1. Performance Review
	Staff performance reviews are completed annually with a bonus awarded to all staff with a performance assessment of 'Exceptionally Effective'. Table 1 details the amounts that would have been paid to individual members of staff with an 'exceptionally effective' rating.
	This does not represent the total amount paid in bonuses to all staff in the relevant grades. This information and the data for the rest of the Department is not held centrally and could be collected only at disproportionate cost.
	 2. Reward and Recognition Scheme
	All bonus payments are awarded with reference to the guidance contained in the Home Office 'Reward and Recognition' scheme. Use of a special bonus allows management to respond quickly to effort or excellence. Table 2 shows the highest and lowest bonuses paid.
	
		
			  Table 1 
			  Financial year  Percentage  IO  ()  SIO  () 
			 2002-03 1 303 322 
			 2003-04 2 623 763 
			 2004-05 2 629 771 
			 2005-06 2 649 795 
			 2006-07 2 666 815 
			 2007-08(1) 2 672 824 
			 (1) The anticipated amount that will be paid for 'exceptionally effective' performance between April 2007 and March 2008.  Note: Calculations are based on 2 per cent. (1 per cent . 2002-03) of the 'Target rate' of the appropriate pay scale. 
		
	
	
		
			  Table 2 
			   
			  Financial year  Total bonus payments  Highest bonus paid  Lowest bonus paid 
			 2002-03 5,900 700 400 
			 2003-04 8,550 500 450 
			 2004-05 8,200 1,000 300 
			 2005-06 6,550 800 250 
			 2006-07 6,400 500 250 
			 2007-08(1) 8,120 650 150 
			 (1) All awards have been made for 07/08; therefore this is the final total for the current financial year.

Departmental Official Cars

Stephen Hammond: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department which make and model of car she has chosen as her Ministerial car to be provided by the Government Car and Despatch Agency.

Liam Byrne: I refer the hon. Member to the answer given by my hon. Friend, the Parliamentary Under-Secretary of State for Transport, (Jim Fitzpatrick) on 16 July 2008,  Official Repor t, column 414W.

Departmental Pay

Christopher Huhne: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how much her Department paid to staff in annual appraisal-related end-year bonuses in 2007-08.

Jacqui Smith: For staff in Home Office Headquarters, UK Border Agency, and the senior civil service (SCS) end of year bonuses are linked to annual appraisals.
	For 2007-08 these bonuses will be paid in July salaries along with the annual pay award and therefore this information will not be available until September.
	Identity and Passport Service (IPS) does not operate an end of year annual appraisal related bonus scheme for all its staff. Where bonuses are applicable, these are expected to be paid in July salaries and this information will not be available until September.
	Staff in the Criminal Records Bureau do not receive end of year appraisal bonuses.

Departmental Publicity

Philip Hammond: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how much her Department and its agencies spent on staff working on  (a) marketing and  (b) branding in the last 12 month period for which figures are available.

Liam Byrne: The total cost of staff responsible for Marketing and branding for the 12 month period ending 31 December 2007 is detailed in the following table.
	The marketing staff delivered campaigns including alcohol, harm reduction, drugs prevention, police recruitment, immigration control, advice to employers and changes to passport applications
	The total cost of staff responsible for marketing and branding for the 12 month period ending 31 December 2007 is detailed in the following table:
	
		
			  January 2007 to December 2007 
			   
			   Staff costs for  m arketing  Staff costs for  b randing 
			 Home Office 990,630 3,124 
			 Borders and Immigration Agency 238,345 124,710 
			 Identity and Passport Service 774,436 104,453 
			 Total 2,003,411 232,287

Departmental Responsibilities

Francis Maude: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many reviews of regulation her Department and its agencies have conducted or commenced since July 2007; and in which areas.

Liam Byrne: The Government's approach to post-legislative scrutiny was set out by the Leader of the House of Commons (Ms Harman) in Post-legislative Scrutiny - The Government's Approach (Cm 7320) published in March 2008. The Home Office is following this new systematic process to post-legislative scrutiny. Reviews that are undertaken under the new process will, where necessary, be submitted to the Home Affairs Select Committee and copies made available on the Home Office website. In addition, the revised impact assessment (IA) process has increased the focus on post implementation reviews, with each individual IA setting out when the policy would be reviewed.

Departmental Sick Leave

Mark Hoban: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many working days were lost by her Department due to stress-related illness in each of the last 24 months.

Liam Byrne: 31,194 days were lost during 2006-07, and 36,877 days lost from 2007-08.
	In 2006-07, the Home Office HQ included the following departments: Communities Group, NOMS and OCJR which have now all transferred out. It is important to note that NOMS and OCJR left in May 2007 to join Ministry of Justice, and therefore have been included for the month of April 2007. Communities Group transferred to DCLG in May 2006.
	The information has been drawn from the Home Office personnel system (Adelphi). Calculations are based on a 12-month rolling period as monthly calculations are not an accurate representation of working days lost.

Departmental Written Questions

David Simpson: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how long on average her Department took to answer  (a) ordinary written and  (b) named day questions in each of the last three years.

Tony McNulty: The information for each member could be obtained only at disproportionate cost.
	However, a manual check of the parliamentary questions database showed that it took on average, 11 days to answer written questions tabled by the hon. Member for Upper Bann from the start of the 2007-08 session to the 3 July 2008.

Deportation: Iran

David Heyes: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department if she will suspend the return to Iran of Iranian nationals who are converts to Christianity and who have been denied asylum in the UK in light of the consideration by the Iranian Government of a mandatory death sentence for apostasy from Islam.

Liam Byrne: holding answer 21 July 2008
	We only enforce the return of individuals, including Christian converts from Iran, whom we, and the independent immigration judges, are satisfied are not in need of protection.
	Each case is carefully considered on its individual merits against the background of the 1951 UN Refugee Convention and the latest available country information. We do not accept that each and every asylum seeker who presents themselves as being from a particular country or religion, regardless of their individual circumstances, should automatically be afforded protection in the UK.

Detention Centres

Tom Brake: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many  (a) families and  (b) people in such families have been detained in immigration removal centres in (i) each year from 1997 to 2007 and (ii) each month in 2008 for which data is available.

Liam Byrne: The historical information requested could be obtained only by the detailed examination of individual case records at disproportionate cost.
	We can provide local management information on the number of family units taken into detention from 31 March 2006 to date:
	
		
			  Period  Number of family units entering detention 
			 31 March 2006 to 29 March 2007 894 
			 30 March 2007 to 3 April 2008 825 
			 4 April 2008 to 1 May 2008 50 
			 2 May 2008 to 29 May 2008 60 
			 30 May 2008 to 26 June 2008 64 
			 27 June 2008 to 10 July 2008 28 
		
	
	The figures may include families detained on more than one occasion, do not constitute part of the National Statistics and are based solely on locally researched management information. This information has not been quality assured under National Statistics protocols and should be treated as provisional.
	We do not hold local management information on the number of family members entering detention.
	Quarterly data are published in the Asylum Statistics United Kingdom quarterly publications, showing the number of people detained solely under Immigration Act powers on the last Saturday of each quarter. Statistics on the total number of persons recorded as being removed from the UK upon leaving detention each quarter are also published.
	Copies of the aforementioned publications are available from the Library of the House and the Home Office Research Development and Statistics Directorate website at:
	http://www.homeoffice.gov.uk/rds/immigration-asylum-stats.html.

Domestic Violence

Margaret Moran: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department if she will publish the minutes of the Ministerial Action Group on domestic violence on a regular basis.

Vernon Coaker: We do not publish the minutes of the Inter-Ministerial Group (IMG) on domestic violence (set up in 2003). This is because the minutes often record the considerations made when formulating and developing Government policy. Any premature disclosure may result in closing off alternative decisions or courses of action.
	A report on the progress made against the national domestic violence delivery plan, which the IMG oversees, is published annually. The annual reports for 2005-06 and 2006-07 are on the website and the report for 2007-08 will be published shortly.

Entry Clearances: Overseas Students

Hugh Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department pursuant to the Answer of 8 July 2008,  Official Report, column 1443W, on entry clearances: overseas students, whether her figures take account of gap year students entering the UK on  (a) EU passports and  (b) ancestor visas.

Liam Byrne: holding answer 21 July 2008
	The numbers provided in my answer of 8 July 2008,  Official Report, column 1443W, related only to visas issued in the entry category Gap Year Entrant for Work in Schools. UK Ancestry is a separate entry category for persons aged 17 or over who intend to take or seek employment in the UK. Persons admitted in this category are allowed to stay for an initial period of five years, after which they may apply for Indefinite Leave to Remain. Unlike the Gap Year entry category, the UK Ancestry route is therefore not restricted to young persons who only wish to spend a limited period of time working in the UK.
	I also confirm that the numbers given do not include EU nationals who have the right of free movement and residence in all member states.

Entry Clearances: Overseas Students

Hugh Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department pursuant to the answer of 8 July 2008,  Official Report, columns 1443-4W, on entry clearances: overseas students, what allowance has been made for gap year students wishing to take a second working holiday after university.

Liam Byrne: holding answer 21 July 2008
	Participants will be allowed one period of stay of up to two years under the terms of the new Youth Mobility Scheme. Young people who have previously spent time in the UK on one of our existing youth mobility-type arrangements, except for the Working Holidaymaker Scheme but including the Gap Year Entrants concession, will be eligible to apply to enter under the new Youth Mobility Scheme where they can demonstrate they meet its requirements.

Entry Clearances: Overseas Students

Hugh Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department pursuant to the answer of 8 July 2008,  Official Report, columns 1443-4W, on entry clearances: overseas students, what arrangements have been made for gap year students who are 17 years of age on entry to the UK but have their 18th birthday during their stay.

Liam Byrne: holding answer 21 July 2008
	The concession for gap year entrants allows applicants to be aged 17, 18 or 19 when they apply under the concession. A participant in the scheme can enter and remain in the UK for up to 12 months on a gap year entry clearance, and this is not affected by any birthday he may have while in the UK. These conditions will continue to apply to any participants in possession of valid gap year entrant entry clearances when the scheme is abolished later this year prior to the launch of the new Youth Mobility Scheme (YMS) under the points based system (PBS).

Essex Police Authority

David Amess: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what  (a) discussions she has had with and  (b) representations she has received from the Essex Police Authority since January 2008 on the report on sustainable policing produced by the Association of Chief Police Officers and the Association of Police Authorities; and if she will make a statement.

Tony McNulty: None. The case made in Sustainable Policing was taken into account in developing the final police grant settlement tabled by my right hon. Friend the Home Secretary on 4 February.

Essex Police Authority: Finance

David Amess: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how much was spent on  (a) involuntary and  (b) voluntary exit schemes at Essex Police Authority for staff at each grade in each year since 1997-98; how much is planned to be spent in 2008-09; and if she will make a statement.

Tony McNulty: The Home Office does not hold information relating to how much was spent on exit schemes at the Essex Police Authority since 1997-98.

Essex Police Authority: Finance

David Amess: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what  (a) discussions she has had with and  (b) representations she has received from the Essex Police Authority on (i) overspend and (ii) underspend by the authority since January 2008; what reply was given to such representations; and if she will make a statement.

Tony McNulty: We have not received any representations nor held any discussions with Essex Police Authority on overspends or underspends.
	Decisions on the distribution of resources are matters for the Chief Officer and the Police Authority. It is a legal requirement for the Police Authority to set balanced budgets taking into account any use of reserves.

Essex Police Authority: Job Satisfaction

David Amess: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what assessment she has made of levels of job satisfaction of Essex Police Authority's staff in each year since 1997; what assessment she has made of trends in such levels; if she will place in the Library copies of such assessments; and if she will make a statement.

Tony McNulty: The Home Office does not hold information relating to the levels of job satisfaction of Essex Police Authority's staff.

Essex Police Authority: Manpower

David Amess: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many  (a) police officers and  (b) civilian staff were employed by Essex Police Authority and its predecessor bodies in (i) 1979, (ii) 1989, (iii) 1999 and (iv) each year since 2001, broken down by (A) age and (B) sex.

Tony McNulty: The available information about the number of personnel in the Essex police is set out in the following tables. Historical data on police staff at force level are not available before 1986 and were not collected by gender until 1995. Data on age are only available from March 2003 and in the format set out at the table.
	
		
			  Table 1: Essex policeofficers and staff by gender( 1) 
			   Police officers  Police staff 
			  As at 31 March  Male  Female  Male  Female 
			 1979 2,259 202 Not available 
			 1989 2,496 250 (2)950.5 
			 1999 2,413 477 419.5 857.5 
			 2001 2,419 468 492.5 933.0 
			 2002 2,433 512 553.5 996.5 
			 2003 2,413 576 602.5 1,050.0 
			 2004 2,443 655 691.0 1,153.0 
			 2005 2,489 701 715.0 1,218.0 
			 2006 2,520 759 724.5 1,208.0 
			 2007 2,468 829 729.0 1,145.5 
			 (1) All figures are full-time equivalent. (2) Data were not collected by gender for police staff until 1995. 
		
	
	
		
			  Table 2: Officers and staff by age( 1,2) 
			   2002-03  2003-04  2004-05  2005-06  2006-07 
			  Police officers  
			 25 and under 353 406 460 483 517 
			 26 to 40 1,630 1,696 1,719 1,766 1,592 
			 41 to 55 1,046 1,048 1,080 1,105 1,267 
			 Over 55 11 15 19 20 21 
			   
			  Police staff  
			 25 and under 203 250 235 277 235 
			 26 to 40 614 674 678 674 606 
			 41 to 55 722 742 768 757 785 
			 Over 55 307 398 485 462 509 
			 (1) As these data are not usually published they has not been subjected to the normal verification by the Home Office. (2) Age data are by headcount and will not equate to the full-time equivalent number of officers and staff.

Essex Police Authority: Per Capita Costs

David Amess: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department 
	(1)  how much funding was allocated per head of population to Essex Police Authority in 2007-08; how much is planned for 2008-09; and if she will make a statement;
	(2)  what the police grant funding for Essex Police Authority was in 2007-08; how much is proposed for 2008-09; and if she will make a statement.

Tony McNulty: The information requested is set out in the following table.
	The Government do not distribute grant to police authorities purely on the basis of population. The police funding formula uses a range of data relating to demographic and social characteristics to reflect the relative needs of each authority. Grant allocations also take into account the relative tax base of each authority. Grant allocations are stabilised by damping to limit year-on-year variations.
	
		
			  Essex police authority Government revenue grant allocations 2007-08 and 2008-09 
			   Government grant( 1 ) ( million)  Resident population (Million) 
			 2007-08 187.91 1.66 
			 2008-09 196.32 1.69 
			 (1) Revenue funding includes all grants inside aggregate external finance (AEF) (i.e. revenue grants paid for councils' core services), and includes formula grant and all specific grants.  Sources: Population: Office of National Statistics, mid year population estimates and projections. Grants: DCLG

Essex Police Authority: Redundancy

David Amess: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many staff employed by Essex Police Authority will be made  (a) voluntarily and  (b) compulsorily redundant in 2008-09; and what cost; and if she will make a statement.

Tony McNulty: The Home Office does not hold information relating to how many staff employed by the Essex Police Authority will be made redundant (either compulsorily or voluntarily) in 2008-09.

Essex Police Authority: Regulation

David Amess: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what legislation regulates Essex Police Authority; what amendments have been made to, and what recent representations she has received about the operation of this legislation; what  (a) statutory instruments,  (b) departmental circulars and  (c) other documents she (i) has issued and (ii) plans to issue in the next 12 months consequential to the provisions of this legislation; and if she will make a statement.

Tony McNulty: Essex Police Authority, like all police authorities, is regulated by the Police and Justice Act 1996, as amended, and regulations issued under the provisions of that Act. A full list of the amending Acts will be placed in the Library of the House.
	I have recently issued three sets of regulations regarding police authorities, numbered 82, 312, 630 and 631 of 2008. I have also recently issued Home Office Circular 004/2008 which concerns policing plans. I plan to issue two further sets of regulations in the next 12 months regarding community engagement of police authorities, and the reporting requirements for police authorities.
	Documents to be placed in the Library of the House:
	Acts of Parliament which have Amended the Police Act 1996
	The Justices of the Peace Act 1997 inserted references to that Act in relation to Justices of the Peace
	The Greater London Authority Act 1999 made amendments to establish the Metropolitan Police Authority
	The Local Authorities (Functions and Responsibilities) (England) Regulations 2000 amended the way councillors are appointed to police authorities
	The Insolvency Act 2000 amended the insolvency disqualification for police authority members
	The Criminal Justice and Police Act 2001 amended the 1996 Act to allow for Vice-Chairmen of police authorities, to require political balance on police authorities, to dispose of the maximum age requirement for membership of police authorities and to make changes to the allowances for members of police authorities
	The Police Reform Act 2002 removed the need for the Government to approve members' allowances
	The Police and Justice Act 2006 amended the rules on committees of police authorities, removed the best value legislation requirements on police authorities, and enabled the Secretary of State to produce regulations regarding the functions, membership and planning process of police authorities.

Essex Police Authority: Resignations

David Amess: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many officials of each grade have voluntarily ceased employment, other than through redundancy, in Essex Police Authority since June 2007.

Tony McNulty: This information is not collected centrally.

Hezbollah

Lee Scott: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what steps she plans to take to ensure that money raised in the UK for political, social or humanitarian activities by Hezbollah is not used to fund terrorist action.

Tony McNulty: On 2 July 2008, my right hon. Friend the Home Secretary laid a draft order that will, if approved by Parliament, proscribe Hizballah's military wing in substitution for the existing entry on the proscribed list, the 'Hizballah External Security Organisation'. Where allegations are made of links between a charity and terrorist activity, the Charity Commission for England and Wales will deal with them as an immediate priority. It is an operational matter for the police to investigate any allegations that money is being raised or used for terrorist purposes, and the Charity Commission will co-operate fully with the police and other agencies in such cases.

Hunting

David Ruffley: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many  (a) charges,  (b) prosecutions,  (c) fines and  (d) cautions there have been for breaches of the Hunting Act in each police force area since 2006.

Vernon Coaker: In 2006, there were 11 defendants proceeded against at magistrates courts, five defendants found guilty at all courts and five sentenced to a fine for offences under the Hunting Act 2004. There were no offenders cautioned under the Act during the period. Information for 2007 will be available in the autumn of 2008.

Identity Cards: Fess and Charges

Lynne Jones: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what estimate she has made of the likely cost to the individual of  (a) having a suitable photograph taken for and  (b) enrolling their biometrics in the identity card scheme.

Meg Hillier: The 2008 Delivery Plan sets out that IPS are currently looking at new ways of recording fingerprints and photographs to make it easy and convenient for individuals to be enrolled onto the National Identity Register. For example, we are looking to a future where the market would provide biometric enrolment services, giving citizens a choice of competing services which should maximise convenience and drive down price.
	We are currently considering how best this can be provided to the highest possible security standards, through a market with competing third parties. Until this work is completed, we are unable to speculate on the final costs to individual citizens.

Illegal Immigrants

John Hayes: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many people were detected trying to enter the UK illegally in each year since 1997; how many of those people subsequently claimed asylum; and how many were removed from the UK after their asylum claim was rejected.

Liam Byrne: The information about the number of people who were detected trying to enter the UK illegally prior to 2002 is not available due to a change in our data collection systems in 2003. Official figures for 2007 are not yet available.
	Locally collated management information for the period 2003 to 2006 is provided in the following tables. The figures include all those illegal entrants detected at ports of entry.
	Between 2003 and 2006, 5,917 people were detected trying to enter the UK illegally, or seeking to enter illegally, while during the same period nearly 48,000 were detected in France and Belgium seeking to enter the UK illegally. A further 74,000 illegal entrants were prevented from flying to the UK through the combined efforts of the Airline Liaison Officer Network and respective carriers.
	The additional information requested in relation to how many of these people subsequently claimed asylum and how many of those were then removed from the United Kingdom could be obtained only by the detailed examination of individual case records at disproportionate cost.
	
		
			  N umber of people detected trying to enter the UK illegally from 2003 until 2006, broken down by port 
			   Total each year 
			  Initiating port/local enforcement office  2003  2004  2005  2006  2003-06 
			 Aberdeen 0 0 0 2 2 
			 Dorset Ports Office 0 0 18 123 141 
			 Dover 1,690 871 661 611 3,833 
			 Dartford 31 38 8 32 109 
			 Harwich 31 32 32 27 122 
			 Hull 304 186 81 45 616 
			 Newhaven 17 71 36 26 150 
			 Plymouth 0 0 0 2 2 
			 Portsmouth Ports Office 0 187 108 74 369 
			 Purfleet 14 52 1 0 67 
			 Ramsgate 122 48 48 110 328 
			 Sheerness 2 0 0 0 2 
			 Tees Ports Office 53 14 6 21 94 
			 Tilbury Ports Office 15 15 1 19 50 
			 Tyne Commission Quay 5 15 11 1 32 
			   
			 Total 2,284 1,529 1,011 1,093 5,917 
			  Notes: 1. Figures for 2003 for Portsmouth, Plymouth and Dorset were not available. 2. These data have been compiled from locally held Management Information and as such do not represent National Statistics. They may therefore be subject to change. 
		
	
	
		
			  The number of individual attempts by people crossing the Channel illegally at the juxtaposed controls 
			   Total each year 
			  UK juxtaposed controls( 1)  2003  2004  2005  2006  2003-06 
			 Calais 3,236 6,189 9,746 12,508 31,679 
			 Coquelles 3,396 2,969 2,427 2,160 10,952 
			 Dunkerque 0 1,296 1,691 2,230 5,217 
			 Total 6,632 10,454 13,864 16,898 47,848 
			 (1) The UK Juxtaposed Controls figures incorporate all detections made by all agencies including Calais Chamber of Commerce (CCCI), Eamus Cork Solutions (ECS), UK Border Agency. 
		
	
	
		
			  N umber of inadequately documented passengers denied boarding from flights to UK, by carriers after reference to ALO and by carriers without reference to ALO, from 2003 until 2006 
			   Number 
			 2003 16,508 
			 2004 16,767 
			 2005 15,255 
			 2006 26,307 
			 Total 74,747 
		
	
	There is a big increase in the figures from 2005-06. Prior to 2006 we only kept detailed denied boarding figures on ALO home locations and not the region for which they were responsible.

Illegal Immigrants

Jim Cunningham: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what steps the Government has taken to reduce illegal immigration since 1997.

Liam Byrne: holding answer 29 February 2008
	Over the last 12 months we have drawn up plans for the biggest ever shake-up of Britain's border security. This year we will make the change.
	We have put in place fingerprint checks before we issue a visa anywhere in the world. We have already delivered 1.4 million sets of finger-scans, generating over 14,000 hits and bringing to notice 1,255 cases of identity swaps.
	In February, we introduced large on the spot fines for employers who don't make the right checks. In financial year 2006-07, there were 15 successful prosecutions including cautions under section 8, and 21 so far this financial year.
	Last month we introduced the first stage of the points based system as part of a phased approach to manage the flow of migrants coming to the UK. Applicants under the points based system will earn points for their skills and the potential they show for economic success, competence in the English language and ability to support themselves and their dependents. It is a simple, transparent and objective process that enables us to ensure that only those migrants who benefit the UK can come here to work or study. So far over 1,800 applications have been received under tier 1, highly skilled migrant workers. Future tiers will include students, skilled workers, youth mobility and temporary workers.
	On 1 April we launched the UK Border Agency, an organisation of 25,000 staff, with a presence in 135 countries world-wide. The new Agency will protect our border with single immigration and customs checks, tackle smuggling, immigration crime and border tax fraud, and implement fast and fair decisions.
	We have already had successes thanks to exporting the border. Airline liaison officers have assisted in preventing nearly 180,000 people boarding planes over the last five years. That's equivalent to about two jumbo jets a week. In 2007 our strengthening of cross channel border controls stopped 17,658 individual attempts to cross the channel illegally. Additionally at juxtaposed controls in France and Belgium we have refused over 6,000 people entry to the UK. This means the number of illegal immigrants arriving in Kent from juxtaposed locations has reduced by 86 per cent. since 2002.

Illegal Immigrants: Deportation

Edward Garnier: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department by what means her Department ensures that deported convicted foreign nationals cannot return to the United Kingdom at a later date.

Liam Byrne: The UK Border Agency maintains a database which contains information on all foreign nationals who are deported from the United Kingdom (UK). All passengers arriving in the UK and all visa applicants are checked against this database. On the basis of that, immigration officers and entry clearance officers will make a decision (under Paragraph 320(2) of the Immigration Rules) on entry to the UK.

Immigration

Damian Green: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department whether her Department plans to collect additional data from migrants via landing cards.

Liam Byrne: A new style landing card is being phased in to reflect the changes to the UK Border Agency. This includes an extra question as to the passenger's proposed length of stay in the UK.
	In addition, as the e-Borders Programme rolls out, we will be collecting additional passenger information. Full details of the information to be collected by e-Borders has been outlined in Schedule 1 to The Immigration and Police (Passenger, Crew and Service Information) Order 2008, which formed part of the legislative package underpinning the e-Borders programme. The order came into force on 1 March 2008, after clearing parliamentary scrutiny.
	The longer term future of the landing card is under review.

Immigration: Children

Andrew Smith: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what procedures are in place to ascertain and record the citizenship of children who  (a) accompany foreign national parents (i) into immigration detention and (ii) upon removal from the UK and  (b) are included in family removal directions made under section 10A of the Immigration Act 1971.

Liam Byrne: Information relating to families and dependant children including welfare issues, preparatory and detention visits, actual detention, mitigating circumstances, absent family members, removal and citizenship is ascertained during contact management events and recorded on the recently introduced Family Welfare Form. This information is also recorded electronically and on the family's paper file.
	The general processes followed in relation to family cases are all contained within chapter 45 of the Enforcement Instructions and Guidance. Processes concerning the setting of removal directions and actual removal under Para 9 and 10 of Schedule 2 of the Immigration Act 1971 are in chapter 47.
	The Enforcement Instructions and Guidance is available to view on the UK Border Agency external website at:
	http://www.ukba.homeoffice.gov.uk/policyandlaw/guidance/enforcement/

Immigration: Police Custody

David Ruffley: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department 
	(1)  on how many occasions the Immigration Service has used police cells to hold immigrants in each police force area in each year since 1997; and what the average cost of such accommodation was in each year in each police force area;
	(2)  what the nightly rate paid by the Immigration Service for the use of police cells was to each police force in each year since 1997.

Liam Byrne: The information requested could be obtained only by the detailed examination of individual records at disproportionate cost.

Lost Working Days

John Hayes: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many working days have been lost due to industrial action by employees for which her Department is responsible in each year since 1997.

Liam Byrne: Table 1 shows the total number of days lost due to industrial action in Home Office Headquarters, UK Border Agency, Identity and Passport Service and Criminal Records Bureau in 2007 and 2008.
	The Department does not hold historical information on levels of industrial action. The payroll system holds details of absence due to industrial action but it is not possible to produce accurate information prior to 2007 due to the level of payroll changes over time.
	
		
			  Table 1: Number of days lost due to industrial action 
			  Period  Number 
			 1 January 2007 to 31 December 2007 10,954 
			 1 January 2008 to 30 June 2008 2,586

Offensive Weapons: Detection Rates

David Simpson: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department 
	(1)  what the percentage clear-up rate for knife crime in each region was in the last 12 months;
	(2)  how many people in each region of England and Wales were charged with offences relating to knife crime in each of the last three years;
	(3)  how many offences were committed in each region of England and Wales in which a knife was employed by the perpetrator in each of the last three years.

Vernon Coaker: It is not possible to identify those offences that are knife-related from the data centrally collected on overall recorded crime. However, since April 2007, police forces have been providing the Home Office with aggregate data on serious violence (attempted murder, GBH and robbery) involving knives and sharp instruments. Data relating to such offences recorded during 2007-08 were published in table 3.09 of the recent Crime in England and Wales 2007/08 statistical bulletin. A breakdown by region is shown in table A. Information about the number of persons charged and number of offences detected, or 'cleared-up', by police cannot be provided as they are not collected on the new statistical return.
	Available data from the Homicide Index relates to offences currently recorded as homicide where the apparent method of killing was 'sharp instrument', as at 12 November 2007. Table B shows the number of such offences recorded within each region in England and Wales in the years 2004-05, 2005-06 and 2006-07, the number of these homicides with a current suspect and the number that have resulted in a homicide conviction. Figures for 2007-08 are scheduled to be published in January 2009.
	
		
			  Table A: Knife and sharp instrument offences( 1)  recorded by the police for selected offences( 2) , by region: England and Wales 2007-08 
			  Region  Number of offences 
			 North East 613 
			 North West 3,709 
			 Yorkshire and the Humber 1,629 
			 East Midlands 1,316 
			 West Midlands 2,826 
			 East of England 1,112 
			 London 7,428 
			 South East 1,432 
			 South West 920 
			 Wale 897 
			 British Transport Police 269 
			 England and Wales 22,151 
			 (1) Refers to the use of a knife or sharp instrument. (2) Total of selected serious offences only: attempted murder; wounding with intent to do GBH; wounding or inflicting GBH (i.e. without intent), which includes racially or religiously aggravated wounding or inflicting GBH; robbery of business property; robbery of personal property. Other offences involving the use of a knife or sharp instrument may exist, but are not shown in this table. 
		
	
	
		
			  Table B: Currently recorded homicides( 1 ) where apparent method of killing is sharp instrument( 2) , by region: England and Wales, 2004-05 to 2006-07( 3,4) 
			  Number 
			   2004-05  2005-06  2006-07 
			  Region  Total number of offences recorded  With current suspect  Resulted in homicide conviction  Total number of offences recorded  With current suspect  Resulted in homicide conviction  Total number of offences recorded  With current suspect  Resulted in homicide conviction 
			 North East 11 11 10 13 13 12 18 17 7 
			 North West 44 40 31 29 28 20 29 20 6 
			 Yorkshire and the Humber 26 26 23 20 20 17 20 17 11 
			 East Midlands 11 11 11 18 18 15 24 20 11 
			 West Midlands 30 27 25 25 23 17 28 21 7 
			 East of England 13 12 9 18 16 11 25 24 6 
			 London 62 57 54 56 54 44 69 48 9 
			 South East 30 29 26 25 24 10 21 15 2 
			 South West 19 17 14 8 8 7 13 7 5 
			 Wales 13 13 11 7 7 6 11 9 5 
			 British Transport Police  
			 England and Wales 259 243 214 219 211 159 258 198 69 
			 (1) As at 12 November 2007; figures are revised as cases are dealt with by the police and by the courts, or as further information becomes available. (2) Includes knives as well as other sharp instruments. (3) Offences are shown according to the year in which the police initially recorded the offence as homicide. This is not necessarily the year in which the incident took place or the year in which any court decision was made. (4) Data for 2007-08 are scheduled to be published in January 2009.

Olympic Games 2012: Security

Christopher Huhne: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department 
	(1)  when the costed security plan being prepared by the Olympic Security Directorate will be finalised;
	(2)  what estimate she has made of the  (a) total costs and  (b) costs additional to existing budgets of providing security for the Olympic games in each year until 2012.

Jacqui Smith: A costed security plan for the London 2012 Olympic and Paralympic games will be agreed by the end of 2008. 600 million has been allocated for policing and wider security, in addition to the provision by the Olympic Delivery Authority and by the London Organising Committee for the Olympic games.

Overseas Students: Languages

Tobias Ellwood: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what steps the Government is taking to prevent unaccredited language schools being used as avenues for illegal entry into the UK.

Liam Byrne: holding answer 21 July 2008
	 We have been working closely with the Joint Education Taskforce and Ofsted and from early 2009 accreditation by an independent accreditation body approved by the UK Border Agency will be required by all private education providers that recruit international students.
	This means that any private college delivering English language courses to international students coming to the UK under our new Australian style points system or in the student visitor category will need to hold independent accreditation.
	The intention of demanding independent accreditation will be to assure the UK Border Agency that an institution is genuinely providing good quality education rather than offering low quality courses for the purposes of facilitating applications by bogus students.
	In the interim the UK Border Agency will continue to act upon allegations and intelligence relating to English language schools that are suspected of being bogus.

Passports: Interviews

Damian Green: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department 
	(1)  what the cost of each of the passport interview centres was in June 2008;
	(2)  how many people had been interviewed at each of the passport interview centres by 30 June 2008; and what the cost per interview was for each office.

Meg Hillier: The total operating costs for the interview office network of 68 offices during June 2008 was 2.4 million which excludes the cost of depreciation of relevant set-up capital expenditure. There are a number of central costs within the 2.4 million such as call centre appointments and IT maintenance which make it impossible to give meaningful comprehensive monthly costs for each individual office. A total of 32,792 interviews were carried out in the network during June resulting in an average cost per interview of 73.19, just below the planned figure.

Passports: Lost Property

David Hamilton: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many passports were reported lost or stolen by people aged  (a) under 18,  (b) between 19 and 25,  (c) between 25 and 35,  (d) between 35 and 45,  (e) between 45 and 55,  (f) between 55 and 65 and  (g) over 65 years old in the last year for which figures are available.

Meg Hillier: Procedures and supporting systems for reporting lost, stolen and recovered British passports were introduced in December 2003. Since then the Identity and Passport Service has provided a range of management information on the number of passports that have been processed under these arrangements. In 2007 there were 251,751 reports of lost passports and 41,393 reports of stolen passports. In addition 10,428 passports were reported under the other category which includes those damaged or destroyed. The systems, however, do not capture specifically the age of the holder whose passport is reported lost or stolen.

Police Custody: ICT

David Ruffley: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what progress has been made on the development and provision of electronic custody systems for the police; when such systems will be available; what the expected cost of such systems is; what the cost of their development has been to date; and what the planned date was for such systems to be available.

Tony McNulty: All forces now have an electronic custody system in use at all custody sites. 24 police forces are equipped with the National Strategy for Police Information Systems (NSPIS) custody system. The other 19 forces have implemented alternative custody systems that conform to the same data standards.
	The cost of these systems varies from force to force, depending upon the size of the force and the particular system chosen. Furthermore, some systems were deployed as part of an integrated suite of applications and so the actual cost of the custody element cannot be identified separately.
	The target date for the implementation of these systems was 31 March 2008.

Police: North Yorkshire

Anne McIntosh: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what assessment she has made of the level of provision of policing in the sparsely populated countryside of North Yorkshire; and if she will make a statement.

Tony McNulty: The provision of policing across the force area is a matter for the chief officer and the police authority.

Police: Public Participation

Jim Cunningham: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what steps the Government have taken to include the views of the public when deciding national policing priorities.

Tony McNulty: holding answer 10 July 2008
	Since April there has been a neighbourhood policing team in every areameeting the Government's commitment. Neighbourhood policing gives local communities a role in deciding policing priorities by working with them to identify and tackle local problems together, as well as providing a highly visible presence.
	Both Sir Ronnie Flanagan's review of policing and the Casey review 'Engaging Communities in Fighting Crime' contain recommendations about how best to embed neighbourhood policing and ensure communities have a say in how they are policed. In the forthcoming Policing Green Paper the new Police Pledge will take forward many of the recommendations and will set out new national standards for the police service to ensure the public receive visible, accountable and responsive policing.

Police: Road Traffic Control

David Ruffley: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what percentage of police resources is allocated to traffic policing in England and Wales, broken down by police force area; how many dedicated traffic police officers there were in each year since 1997, broken down by police force area; what recent discussions she has had with the Association of Chief Police Officers on the number of dedicated traffic police officers; and if she will make a statement.

Tony McNulty: The Home Office police funding formula is designed to assess the relative need for resources between police authorities in England and Wales. The formula does not assign specific funding for any particular aspect of policing. Allocation of resources to specific areas of work within a force is a matter for the police authority and chief officer.
	Available information on the number of police whose main function is traffic is in the following tables.
	The Government have set implementation of the national Roads Policing Strategy as a Key Action for the police in the National Community Safety Plan. How they set about implementing the strategy is an operational matter for the police.
	The Government believe, however, that it is not helpful to focus solely on numbers of dedicated traffic police: it is the most effective and efficient use of all resources that is most significant.
	
		
			  Police Officers (FTE)( 1)  whose primary function is Traffic( 2)  from 2002 - 03 to 2006 - 07 
			 2002-03  2003-04  2004-05  2005-06  2006-07 
			 Avon and Somerset 216 222 228 215 148 
			 Bedfordshire 75 80 80 81 68 
			 Cambridgeshire 85 99 101 99 96 
			 Cheshire 194 200 194 85 91 
			 Cleveland 64 73  61 72 
			 Cumbria 107 110 108 111 114 
			 Derbyshire 107 121 116 119 110 
			 Devon and Cornwall 192 198 211 215 225 
			 Dorset 91 86 82 81 80 
			 Durham 111 119 108 105 100 
			 Essex 241 242 243 243 231 
			 Gloucestershire 62 66 67 73 67 
			 Greater Manchester 406 392 359 342 352 
			 Hampshire 248 246 244 240 237 
			 Hertfordshire 150 151 149 149 145 
			 Humberside 123 119 225 181 100 
			 Kent 104  122 116 109 
			 Lancashire 198 187 190 197 184 
			 Leicestershire 92 95 85 77 72 
			 Lincolnshire 90 89 96 102 100 
			 London, City of 24 24 28 24 23 
			 Merseyside 125 119 115 138 150 
			 Metropolitan Police 583 592 1029 603 611 
			 Norfolk 120 121 107 112 110 
			 Northamptonshire 70 71 65 63 63 
			 Northumbria 245 253 165 167 172 
			 North Yorkshire 151 138 101 97 99 
			 Nottinghamshire  121 133 134 139 
			 South Yorkshire 180 127 134 141 143 
			 Staffordshire 50 49 58 28 35 
			 Suffolk 68 72 76 80 77 
			 Surrey 108 110 107 99 87 
			 Sussex 164 163 163 160 169 
			 Thames Valley 259 259 245 236 237 
			 Warwickshire 103 103 93 97 93 
			 West Mercia 292 115 117 116 129 
			 West Midlands 384 405 393 401 383 
			 West Yorkshire 320 314 317 343 324 
			 Wiltshire 91 96 93  89 
			 Dyfed Powys 136 105 141 143 136 
			 Gwent 93 95 96 102 95 
			 North Wales 115 114 76 81 98 
			 South Wales 243 245 243 243 252 
		
	
	
		
			  Proportion of Police Officers (FTE)( 1)  whose primary function is Traffic( 2 ) from 2002 - 03 to 2006 - 07 
			  Percentage 
			 2002-03  2003-04  2004-05  2005-06  2006-07 
			 Avon and Somerset 6.8 6.5 6.7 6.3 4.4 
			 Bedfordshire 6.8 6.8 6.6 6.7 5.7 
			 Cambridgeshire 6.1 7.1 7.2 6.9 6.9 
			 Cheshire 9.2 9.2 8.9 3.9 4.2 
			 Cleveland 4.0 4.3  3.6 4.2 
			 Cumbria 9.4 9.0 8.8 9.0 9.1 
			 Derbyshire 5.3 5.8 5.6 5.8 5.4 
			 Devon and Cornwall 6.0 6.0 6.3 6.1 6.5 
			 Dorset 6.4 6.0 5.7 5.5 5.4 
			 Durham 6.7 7.1 6.3 6.2 5.9 
			 Essex 8.1 7.8 7.6 7.4 7.0 
			 Gloucestershire 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.7 5.2 
			 Greater Manchester 5.5 4.9 4.5 4.3 4.5 
			 Hampshire 6.8 6.6 6.6 6.5 6.2 
			 Hertfordshire 7.7 7.2 7.1 7.0 6.7 
			 Humberside 5.8 5.4 10.1 8.1 4.5 
			 Kent 3.0  3.4 3.2 3.0 
			 Lancashire 5.9 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.1 
			 Leicestershire 4.3 4.2 3.7 3.4 3.2 
			 Lincolnshire 7.4 7.2 7.8 8.4 8.2 
			 London, City of 3.0 2.8 3.2 2.8 2.7 
			 Merseyside 3.0 2.9 2.7 3.2 3.4 
			 Metropolitan Police 2.1 2.0 3.4 2.0 2.0 
			 Norfolk 8.0 8.0 6.9 7.2 7.0 
			 Northamptonshire 5.8 5.7 5.2 4.8 4.9 
			 Northumbria 6.2 6.3 4.1 4.2 4.4 
			 North Yorkshire 10.5 9.0 6.5 5.9 6.0 
			 Nottinghamshire  4.9 5.3 5.4 5.8 
			 South Yorkshire 5.7 3.9 4.1 4.3 4.4 
			 Staffordshire 2.3 2.2 2.5 1.2 1.5 
			 Suffolk 5.4 5.5 5.8 6.2 5.7 
			 Surrey 5.6 5.8 5.6 5.2 4.5 
			 Sussex 5.5 5.4 5.4 5.2 5.5 
			 Thames Valley 6.8 6.4 6.0 5.6 5.7 
			 Warwickshire 10.3 10.2 9.2 9.4 8.8 
			 West Mercia 13.0 4.9 4.9 4.9 5.4 
			 West Midlands 5.0 5.1 4.9 4.9 4.7 
			 West Yorkshire 6.4 6.0 5.6 6.1 5.7 
			 Wiltshire 7.8 7.9 7.6  7.4 
			 Dyfed Powys 11.8 9.1 12.0 12.1 11.6 
			 Gwent 6.9 6.9 6.7 7.0 6.3 
			 North Wales 7.5 7.1 4.6 5.0 6.1 
			 South Wales 7.5 7.5 7.4 7.4 7.6 
			 (1) This and other tables contain full-time equivalent figures that have been rounded to the nearest whole number. Because of rounding, there may be an apparent discrepancy between totals and the sums of the constituent items. (2) Staff with multiple responsibilities(or designations) are recorded under their 'primary' role or function. The traffic function includes staff who are predominantly employed on motorcycles or in patrol vehicles for the policing of traffic and motorway related duties. The does not include officers employed in accident investigation, vehicle examination and radar duties.

Police: Sign Language

Cheryl Gillan: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department which police forces have procedures in place to provide British sign language interpreters and lipspeakers on a 24-hour basis for deaf people requiring assistance at police stations; and what steps her Department has taken to facilitate police force compliance with the requirements of the National Agreement on Arrangements for the use of Interpreters, Translators and Language Service Professionals in Investigations and Proceedings within the Criminal Justice System, as revised in 2007.

Tony McNulty: This information is not currently held centrally.
	All chief officers of police have been issued with guidance on the use of the National Agreement.
	ACPO is aiming shortly to write further reminding forces of interpreting requirements for those requiring lip speakers and British Sign Language services. This is being done in partnership with the Office of Criminal Justice Reform, who are preparing an additional leaflet of guidance in respect of deaf people in the criminal justice system.

Police: Standards

David Ruffley: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what the salary and wage costs were of  (a) Her Majesty's Inspectorate of Constabulary,  (b) the National Police Improvement Agency,  (c) the Police Standards Unit and  (d) the Independent Police Complaints Commission in each year since their inception; and how many staff worked in each organisation in each year.

Tony McNulty: The information is as follows:
	
		
			  Her Majesty's Inspectorate of Constabulary (HMIC) 
			   Total staff  Total pay costs ( million) 
			 2007-08 145 8.8 
			 2006-07 137 8.9 
			 2005-06 129 7.1 
			 2004-05 128 7.0 
			 2003-04 128 6.1 
			 2002-03  5.8 
			 2001-02  5.6 
			 2000-01  4.5 
			 1999-2000  3.7 
			 1998-99  3.7 
			 1997-98  3.9 
			  Notes: 1. The first HMIs appointed under the provisions of the County and Borough Police Act 1856, however, numbers prior to 1997-98 are not readily available. 2. HMIC have been unable to provide complete staff numbers within the timeframe as a change in IT systems has meant data are not readily available prior to 2003-04. 3. Total staff numbers include HO and seconded staff. 4. Pay costs rose significantly with effect from 2006-07 as a result of changes to the funding of police officer pensions. 
		
	
	
		
			  National Policing Improvement Agency (NPIA) 
			   Total staff  Total pay costs ( million) 
			 2007-08 1,898 84 
			  Notes: 1. The NPIA was established by the Police and Justice Act 2006 and began its work in April 2007. 2. Staffing numbers include permanent NPIA staff, police, civilian and other secondees, along with contractors, agency and consultants. 
		
	
	
		
			  Police Standards Unit (PSU) 
			   Total staff  Total pay costs ( million) 
			 2007-08 (1) (1) 
			 2006-07 22 2.5 
			 2005-06 58 3.1 
			 2004-05 59 3.6 
			 2003-04 66 2.8 
			 2002-03 (2) (2) 
			 2001-02 29 0.645 
			 (1) In July 2007 the Police Standards Unit merged with the Partnership Performance Support Unit to form the Police and Partnership Standards Unit (PPSU). The rationale for the merger is explained in the PCSD Director's Report 2006-07. The complement for the PPSU in 2007-08 was 33 and the total pay costs were approximately 2.3 million. (2) Unavailable.  Note: The budget and staffing data for PSU is managed at directorate level along with a number of other Home Office units. The figure for 2006-07 only is disaggregated, all the rest include the other units. 
		
	
	 2001- 02
	In response to a PQ on 17 June 2002 we stated that the costs from 1 July 2001 to 17 June 2002 were 709,000. So an estimate for the financial year 2001-02 would be 645,000.
	 2002-03
	We have been unable to locate data for 2002-03 within the timeframe available as data are stored on an old financial system.
	 2003-04 to 2005-06
	These figures include the Police Performance and Framework Team including iQuanta, and the policy team, which from 2006-07 were counted as separate units.
	
		
			  Independent Police Complaints Commission (IPCC) 
			   Total staff  Total pay costs ( million) 
			 2007-08 398 19.1 
			 2006-07 415 20 
			 2005-06 352 16.1 
			 2004-05 208 12.5 
			  Notes: 1. The IPCC became operational on 1 April 2004. 2. The figures in the table are taken from the 2007-08 annual accounts to be laid before Parliament. 3. The figures for pay cost include pension and social security costs. 4. Staff costs and figures include agency staff, seconded staff and commissioners; staff numbers are average.

Police: Stun Guns

David Ruffley: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what plans she has to extend the use of tasers nationwide.

Tony McNulty: Following a trial in five forces in 2003, chief officers of all forces in England and Wales have been able to make the Taser available to authorised firearms officers (AFO) as a less lethal alternative for use in situations where a firearms authority has been granted in accordance with criteria laid down in the ACPO manual of guidance on police use of firearms.
	Following a request by the Association of Chief Police Officers (ACPO), Taser has been deployed since July 2007 by AFO's beyond situations in which a firearms authority has been granted. In these cases, officers would be facing violence or threats of violence of such severity that they would need to use force to protect the public, themselves and/or the subject(s).
	My right hon. Friend the Home Secretary also agreed to a 12 month trial, from 1 September 2007, in 10 selected forces of use of Taser in similar circumstances by specially trained units who are not authorised firearms officers. The Home Office and ACPO will be conducting thorough assessments of the trial and seeking independent medical advice before any further decision on the extension of Taser is taken.

Schengen Agreement

John Hayes: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what UK participation there will be in the Schengen Information System II programme.

Meg Hillier: The Government are fully committed to the UK's participation in the second generation Schengen Information System (SIS II). In order to preserve our border controls, the UK does not participate in Schengen visa and immigration measures. This means that the UK will not have access to information on SIS II relating to third country nationals refused entry to the Schengen area. However, the UK will participate in all other SIS II measures. The information available via SIS II will allow UK law enforcement officers to locate missing persons, criminals and stolen property from across the EU, increasing our opportunities to deal with cross-border crime.

Surveillance: Local Authorities

Eric Pickles: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department pursuant to the answer of 22 May 2008,  Official Report, columns 477-78W, on surveillance: local authorities, how many cases the Investigatory Powers Tribunal has investigated  (a) in total and  (b) in relation to complaints against the use of surveillance by local authorities since its establishment.

Tony McNulty: holding answer 10 July 2008
	The Investigatory Powers Tribunal has issued determinations in respect of 554 complaints from 2 October 2000 to 31 December 2006, the most recent period for which published reports are available. Figures for 2007 are due to be published shortly. It is not the Tribunal's practice to publish more detailed breakdowns by type or body of complaint, in order to preserve the confidence of people using it that their complaint will be handled confidentially. The Investigatory Powers Tribunal is independent of Government and subject to statutory rules which prevent it from disclosing information to an extent, or in a manner, that is contrary to the public interest.

Terrorism

Paul Goodman: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how much the Channel Project to combat violent extremism has spent on community groups; and how much it plans to spend in  (a) 2008-09,  (b) 2009-10 and  (c) 2010-11.

Tony McNulty: There has been no money allocated to the Channel project to spend on community groups.

Terrorism

Paul Goodman: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what the cost of the Channel Project to combat violent extremism was in 2007-08; what the cost is expected to be in  (a) 2008-09,  (b) 2009-10 and  (c) 2010-11; and how those funds will be spent in each of those years.

Tony McNulty: The cost of the Channel Project in 2007-08 was approximately 600,000. The Home Office has allocated 1 million for the project in 2008-09.
	Funding for the pilot areas covers the cost of a full time co-ordinator for the Project in each of the sites. Funding for future years will depend upon the scale of implementation.

Terrorism

Paul Goodman: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department in which areas of the country the Channel Project to combat violent extremism  (a) operates and  (b) is planned to operate; and how those areas were decided upon.

Tony McNulty: In addition to two pilot areas, in London and Lancashire, that have been operating Channel since 2007, a further eight sites, in West Yorkshire, the Midlands, London and Bedfordshire, will be operational in 2008. These sites have been identified through an assessment of local factors, such as strength of partnership working, and the presence of other funding like the Preventing Violent Extremism funding distributed by Communities and Local Government.

Terrorism: Departmental Coordination

Paul Goodman: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what recent discussions she has had with the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government on the development of the Channel Project to combat violent extremism.

Tony McNulty: My right. hon. Friends the Home Secretary and the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government meet frequently to discuss progress on Preventing Violent Extremism. Officials in both departments regularly discuss and review progress on the Channel project.

Vetting: Young People

David Ruffley: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many persons under the age of 18 years have been the subject of Criminal Records Bureau checks in the latest period for which figures are available.

Meg Hillier: During the financial year 2007-08 the Criminal Records Bureau (CRB) has issued 92,717 disclosures to applicants under the age of 18 years.

Yarl's Wood Detention Centre: Pregnant Women

Harry Cohen: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what reports or complaints her Department has been informed regarding pregnant women at Yarl's Wood Immigration Removal Centre receiving inadequate treatment for their condition.

Liam Byrne: Statistics indicate that only one official complaint regarding a pregnant woman at Yarl's Wood has been received in 2008 and this related to the food provided at the centre. Data is not collected in respect of unofficial reports.

Young Offenders: Re-offenders

David Ruffley: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department 
	(1)  what the average number of days from arrest to sentence in cases involving persistent young offenders was in each police force area in the most recent period for which figures are available;
	(2)  how many persistent young offenders were registered in each police force area in each year since 1997; how many offences were recorded in each area where the offender was a persistent young offender in each of those years; and what percentage of total offences this represented in each year, broken down by police force area.

David Hanson: I have been asked to reply.
	A persistent young offender (PYO) is a young person aged 10-17 who has been sentenced guilty by any criminal court in the UK on three or more separate occasions for one or more recordable offence, and within three years of the last sentencing occasion is subsequently arrested or has an information laid against them for a further recordable offence.
	This definition was designed to monitor the pledge to halve the average time from arrest to sentence for dealing with PYOs in England and Wales from 142 days in 1996 to 71 days. This pledge was first met over a full calendar year in 2002 and has been met in all but one calendar year since then. It is important to note that the definition was not designed to monitor overall levels of youth crime.
	Table 1 shows the number of PYOs, and the number of offences committed by them, for each police force area from 1997 to 2007.
	Young offenders are now being dealt with twice as quickly as they were prior to 1997, which means that there are much shorter intervals between sentencing occasions for those youths who repeatedly offend. Youth sentencing is therefore more timely, and for repeat offenders more frequent, than it used to be prior to 1997.
	Table 2 shows the total number of notifiable offences brought to justice, and the proportion of them that are attributable to PYOs, for each police force from 2000 to 2006 (the only years for which this data is available).
	The Ministry of Justice (MOJ) publishes monthly National Statistics on the average number of days from arrest to sentence for PYOs at the following web address:
	www.justice.gov.uk/publications/averagetimearresttosentencepyo.htm
	
		
			  Table 1: Number of Persistent Young Offenders (PYOs) and number of offences committed by PYOs, by police force area, 1997 to 2007 
			   Number of persistent young offenders 
			  Police force area  1997  1998  1999  2000  2001  2002  2003  2004  2005  2006  2007 
			 Avon and Somerset 179 167 166 213 245 268 270 268 308 334 354 
			 Bedfordshire 59 68 76 113 78 74 90 116 98 108 109 
			 Cambridgeshire 111 101 136 164 147 149 163 135 185 183 200 
			 Cheshire 166 196 190 247 211 243 239 249 258 258 268 
			 Cleveland 322 293 301 281 252 272 214 212 197 223 280 
			 Cumbria 148 173 162 183 173 183 188 178 200 220 240 
			 Derbyshire 144 162 193 210 234 244 232 235 244 246 281 
			 Devon and Cornwall 127 154 145 191 222 257 279 324 290 296 356 
			 Dorset 53 55 78 82 94 100 127 132 138 155 144 
			 Durham 191 219 249 277 237 255 212 199 211 237 278 
			 Dyfed-Powys 91 102 91 98 107 109 116 106 114 139 116 
			 Essex 155 186 214 273 270 266 271 280 363 414 432 
			 Gloucestershire 113 80 75 84 111 93 85 95 108 134 155 
			 Greater Manchester 817 872 910 984 1,157 1,149 1,055 1,065 1,127 1,215 1,251 
			 Gwent 122 141 146 198 187 176 203 223 209 211 206 
			 Hampshire 234 358 516 553 566 605 599 616 610 609 688 
			 Hertfordshire 104 91 101 143 128 132 162 187 186 207 228 
			 Humberside 215 243 261 254 284 267 295 332 370 376 397 
			 Kent 198 268 271 341 370 354 399 375 376 388 362 
			 Lancashire 274 363 426 455 485 610 554 509 540 617 642 
			 Leicestershire 145 192 203 218 234 243 264 204 259 259 281 
			 Lincolnshire 119 138 114 137 123 122 143 142 111 110 122 
			 Merseyside 377 426 429 458 496 514 538 557 458 449 520 
			 Metropolitan 864 1,003 1,091 1,100 1,297 1,325 1,251 1,324 1,329 1,486 1,769 
			 Norfolk 97 124 150 163 154 157 163 155 130 155 160 
			 North Wales 108 112 121 182 185 212 237 239 214 225 204 
			 North Yorkshire 120 126 155 184 161 158 167 188 182 203 252 
			 Northamptonshire 102 100 142 158 148 163 129 121 125 115 153 
			 Northumbria 588 669 800 729 811 778 810 771 839 869 908 
			 Nottinghamshire 351 361 340 397 375 417 387 336 404 382 383 
			 South Wales 412 466 496 522 546 522 493 482 435 371 348 
			 South Yorkshire 333 331 349 414 381 412 417 432 409 381 385 
			 Staffordshire 192 217 204 268 258 222 261 274 287 300 292 
			 Suffolk 74 81 99 121 148 174 176 216 239 213 230 
			 Surrey 71 76 86 115 128 115 111 117 126 139 138 
			 Sussex 99 161 158 161 190 236 240 303 363 402 432 
			 Thames Valley 254 251 262 291 316 358 325 303 356 415 442 
			 Warwickshire 68 74 93 104 98 98 88 81 94 109 123 
			 West Mercia 173 158 209 259 237 251 246 267 286 346 323 
			 West Midlands 762 856 840 897 1,012 989 1,013 1,025 877 864 808 
			 West Yorkshire 542 647 732 678 766 731 775 844 868 864 904 
			 Wiltshire 71 85 88 107 108 107 123 126 127 120 131 
			 England and Wales 9,868 11,079 12,014 13,233 13,854 14,244 14,244 14,492 14,827 15,528 16,512 
		
	
	
		
			   Numb er of persistent young offender offences 
			  Police force area  1997  1998  1999  2000  2001  2002  2003  2004  2005  2006  2007 
			 Avon and Somerset 250 233 251 314 449 496 483 456 564 612 691 
			 Bedfordshire 89 101 134 160 142 127 161 226 189 172 213 
			 Cambridgeshire 177 169 251 267 245 283 342 274 315 310 377 
			 Cheshire 264 334 295 378 389 449 439 495 530 483 486 
			 Cleveland 603 538 597 496 506 557 389 395 382 419 534 
			 Cumbria 238 283 293 305 300 318 337 322 352 415 407 
			 Derbyshire 232 233 290 322 411 403 392 414 416 433 477 
			 Devon and Cornwall 183 235 224 299 418 434 504 577 518 485 636 
			 Dorset 75 99 130 109 141 183 219 216 243 274 272 
			 Durham 302 359 457 545 464 506 418 328 382 457 534 
			 Dyfed-Powys 156 180 165 158 212 225 243 199 228 264 238 
			 Essex 230 288 350 455 479 470 451 515 654 736 854 
			 Gloucestershire 182 142 116 135 183 188 196 199 215 285 314 
			 Greater Manchester 1,431 1,536 1,704 1,875 2,290 2,165 1,868 1,889 2,101 2,251 2,336 
			 Gwent 170 243 260 341 336 325 371 421 396 409 416 
			 Hampshire 358 636 965 1,079 1,052 1,236 1,184 1,209 1,128 1,116 1,323 
			 Hertfordshire 153 160 174 199 209 246 276 340 362 356 388 
			 Humberside 287 385 382 412 494 419 502 626 647 653 709 
			 Kent 273 416 424 480 614 619 715 655 673 686 684 
			 Lancashire 451 588 724 830 843 1,089 1,038 944 1,078 1,216 1,279 
			 Leicestershire 236 303 328 374 421 459 452 315 466 439 546 
			 Lincolnshire 181 230 188 228 242 229 261 221 171 199 228 
			 Merseyside 695 726 773 820 966 999 1,016 1,046 835 797 955 
			 Metropolitan 1,504 1,801 1,995 2,001 2,291 2,236 2,081 2,208 2,133 2,549 3,128 
			 Norfolk 155 219 243 268 278 256 294 258 220 271 294 
			 North Wales 178 159 216 273 346 426 452 439 386 402 344 
			 North Yorkshire 178 211 280 282 280 282 305 332 333 380 461 
			 Northamptonshire 146 144 251 298 288 282 254 241 243 235 338 
			 Northumbria 1,002 1,234 1,501 1,539 1,612 1,498 1,622 1,522 1,619 1,730 1,858 
			 Nottinghamshire 507 497 505 669 689 687 672 583 703 709 678 
			 South Wales 757 932 1,010 1,082 1,111 1,100 1,021 905 869 719 643 
			 South Yorkshire 510 511 559 696 645 717 713 738 701 646 649 
			 Staffordshire 285 310 319 400 464 419 517 511 517 515 519 
			 Suffolk 116 116 191 213 285 363 391 447 491 423 435 
			 Surrey 131 138 146 175 235 219 195 239 249 258 252 
			 Sussex 157 259 239 242 335 414 465 617 762 828 855 
			 Thames Valley 366 388 433 455 559 659 562 502 636 721 775 
			 Warwickshire 133 118 174 145 193 172 147 142 177 225 245 
			 West Mercia 257 263 374 392 414 458 445 501 508 628 586 
			 West Midlands 1,306 1,501 1,546 1,663 1,839 1,759 1,810 1,745 1,456 1,401 1,378 
			 West Yorkshire 797 1,034 1,275 1,367 1,327 1,309 1,432 1,626 1,676 1,575 1,696 
			 Wiltshire 104 132 138 151 166 192 203 224 206 202 233 
			 England and Wales 16,010 18,605 21,151 23,131 25,393 26,116 26,086 26,363 27,037 28,252 30,683 
		
	
	
		
			  Table 2: Number of notifiable offences brought to justice, and percentage that were attributable to Persistent Young Offenders, 2000-06 
			  Thousand 
			   Number of notifiable offences brought to justice 
			  Police force area  2000  2001  2002  2003  2004  2005  2006 
			 Avon and Somerset 125.2 119.3 131.8 129.3 136.9 167.7 201.9 
			 Bedfordshire 10.2 10.0 10.1 10.8 11.8 12.6 12.9 
			 Cambridgeshire 30.0 29.9 31.4 31.1 34.5 39.2 49.1 
			 Cheshire 30.3 29.2 29.0 31.8 33.9 41.4 43.8 
			 Cleveland 60.1 57.3 56.0 57.5 67.5 72.8 82.5 
			 Cumbria 16.9 15.1 15.7 16.6 17.1 22.5 24.9 
			 Derbyshire 40.4 40.6 40.8 42.6 38.5 40.8 48.5 
			 Devon and Cornwall 12.7 13.0 13.7 12.8 12.1 13.4 15.5 
			 Dorset 12.5 12.1 12.1 13.2 14.9 15.6 15.1 
			 Durham 52.3 46.9 47.4 48.0 61.7 71.9 66.1 
			 Dyfed-Powys 26.0 24.7 24.5 27.4 29.3 36.3 41.3 
			 Essex 18.4 17.5 17.0 18.8 21.8 24.0 26.0 
			 Gloucestershire 14.6 14.7 15.2 14.9 14.8 16.5 20.6 
			 Greater Manchester 72.0 75.7 79.6 80.4 70.4 70.6 76.1 
			 Gwent 22.4 20.8 23.3 23.4 22.9 25.8 28.0 
			 Hampshire 20.5 21.7 22.1 22.2 24.1 27.6 29.5 
			 Hertfordshire 6.9 8.1 7.7 8.6 9.1 10.5 12.4 
			 Humberside 16.1 17.1 18.4 17.9 18.6 21.1 21.2 
			 Kent 26.4 25.0 23.2 24.6 24.8 27.4 30.0 
			 Lancashire 8.7 10.3 10.8 10.6 11.2 14.4 15.2 
			 Leicestershire 17.7 19.0 17.9 19.3 22.1 25.0 27.4 
			 Lincolnshire 14.0 13.2 12.5 12.9 13.4 12.1 15.0 
			 Merseyside 11.9 10.9 12.2 13.0 12.4 15.6 17.5 
			 Metropolitan 13.9 12.7 13.2 13.7 15.2 15.9 18.6 
			 Norfolk 11.7 11.5 12.0 13.3 15.0 15.3 17.3 
			 North Wales 10.3 11.4 11.6 11.0 11.9 13.3 13.6 
			 North Yorkshire 13.4 13.7 14.9 16.2 19.2 18.8 27.0 
			 Northamptonshire 20.0 21.1 22.0 23.4 25.4 33.2 37.7 
			 Northumbria 30.3 30.9 34.2 32.4 36.2 53.7 51.4 
			 Nottinghamshire 32.3 31.7 32.1 33.1 37.4 38.3 38.4 
			 South Wales 10.5 12.2 11.5 12.8 17.8 15.7 17.5 
			 South Yorkshire 26.6 25.2 24.5 28.3 29.2 33.9 36.6 
			 Staffordshire 20.0 21.9 22.6 23.6 27.2 32.2 34.0 
			 Suffolk 25.3 25.1 27.2 27.4 27.9 30.9 33.0 
			 Surrey 25.9 25.9 27.1 26.8 26.1 34.3 38.3 
			 Sussex 12.7 13.1 13.2 13.3 12.1 14.3 16.2 
			 Thames Valley 10.6 10.9 10.0 11.3 11.5 12.1 12.1 
			 Warwickshire 11.2 11.2 11.3 10.9 15.6 16.2 16.9 
			 West Mercia 13.1 12.6 13.2 13.5 14.8 15.8 18.3 
			 West Midlands 17.1 17.5 16.2 16.8 15.8 15.0 17.7 
			 West Yorkshire 30.4 29.5 30.5 31.6 31.3 30.2 29.6 
			 Wiltshire 11.0 11.3 11.8 12.5 10.9 13.0 13.7 
			 England and Wales 1012.7 1001.3 1031.2 1059.7 1124.6 1277.0 1408.5 
		
	
	
		
			   Percentage of notifiable offences brought to justice attributable to persistent young offenders 
			  Police force area  2000  2001  2002  2003  2004  2005  2006 
			 Avon and Somerset 0.25 0.38 0.38 0.37 0.33 0.34 0.30 
			 Bedfordshire 1.57 1.42 1.26 1.49 1.92 1.50 1.34 
			 Cambridgeshire 0.89 0.82 0.90 1.10 0.79 0.80 0.63 
			 Cheshire 1.25 1.33 1.55 1.38 1.46 1.28 1.10 
			 Cleveland 0.83 0.88 0.99 0.68 0.59 0.52 0.51 
			 Cumbria 1.80 1.99 2.03 2.03 1.88 1.57 1.67 
			 Derbyshire 0.80 1.01 0.99 0.92 1.08 1.02 0.89 
			 Devon and Cornwall 2.35 3.21 3.17 3.94 4.77 3.85 3.13 
			 Dorset 0.87 1.17 1.51 1.66 1.45 1.56 1.81 
			 Durham 1.04 0.99 1.07 0.87 0.53 0.53 0.69 
			 Dyfed-Powys 0.61 0.86 0.92 0.89 0.68 0.63 0.64 
			 Essex 2.47 2.73 2.77 2.40 2.36 2.72 2.83 
			 Gloucestershire 0.92 1.25 1.24 1.31 1.34 1.30 1.38 
			 Greater Manchester 2.61 3.02 2.72 2.32 2.68 2.98 2.96 
			 Gwent 1.52 1.61 1.40 1.59 1.84 1.53 1.46 
			 Hampshire 5.25 4.84 5.60 5.34 5.01 4.09 3.79 
			 Hertfordshire 2.88 2.57 3.19 3.20 3.72 3.45 2.88 
			 Humberside 2.56 2.89 2.28 2.81 3.37 3.06 3.07 
			 Kent 1.82 2.46 2.67 2.90 2.65 2.45 2.28 
			 Lancashire 9.59 8.19 10.06 9.76 8.43 7.50 7.99 
			 Leicestershire 2.11 2.21 2.56 2.35 1.43 1.86 1.61 
			 Lincolnshire 1.63 1.83 1.83 2.03 1.65 1.41 1.33 
			 Merseyside 6.88 8.88 8.18 7.84 8.41 5.34 4.54 
			 Metropolitan 14.44 18.04 17.00 15.19 14.56 13.42 13.70 
			 Norfolk 2.29 2.41 2.14 2.21 1.72 1.44 1.57 
			 North Wales 2.64 3.03 3.67 4.11 3.68 2.91 2.95 
			 North Yorkshire 2.11 2.04 1.89 1.88 1.73 1.77 1.41 
			 Northamptonshire 1.49 1.36 1.28 1.08 0.95 0.73 0.62 
			 Northumbria 5.07 5.22 4.38 5.00 4.20 3.01 3.37 
			 Nottinghamshire 2.07 2.17 2.14 2.03 1.56 1.84 1.85 
			 South Wales 10.33 9.11 9.60 7.96 5.10 5.52 4.11 
			 South Yorkshire 2.62 2.56 2.93 2.52 2.52 2.07 1.76 
			 Staffordshire 2.00 2.12 1.86 2.19 1.88 1.61 1.52 
			 Suffolk 0.84 1.14 1.34 1.43 1.60 1.59 1.28 
			 Surrey 0.68 0.91 0.81 0.73 0.91 0.73 0.67 
			 Sussex 1.90 2.56 3.14 3.49 5.10 5.34 5.11 
			 Thames Valley 4.29 5.15 6.57 4.97 4.37 5.26 5.96 
			 Warwickshire 1.29 1.73 1.53 1.35 0.91 1.09 1.33 
			 West Mercia 2.98 3.29 3.47 3.29 3.39 3.22 3.42 
			 West Midlands 9.74 10.49 10.85 10.77 11.01 9.71 7.89 
			 West Yorkshire 4.50 4.49 4.30 4.54 5.19 5.56 5.33 
			 Wiltshire 1.38 1.47 1.63 1.62 2.06 1.58 1.47 
			 
			 England and Wales 2.28 2.54 2.53 2.46 2.34 2.12 2.01

Bank of Credit and Commerce International

Austin Mitchell: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer which parts of the Sandstorm Report have been released by his Department to the US authorities.

Angela Eagle: The information requested could be provided only at disproportionate cost.

Civil Service: Pay

Chris McCafferty: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer whether he plans to undertake a comprehensive review of Civil Service pay arrangements.

Yvette Cooper: The Government's policy on civil service pay is reviewed annually, and is set out in the civil service pay guidance.

Council Tax

Eric Pickles: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer pursuant to the Answer of 20 May 2008,  Official Report, column 206W, on council tax, how many notification changes have been made to the council tax list with a code of CL26 in  (a) each year from 2003 to 2005 and  (b) 2006-07.

Jane Kennedy: The number of properties, in England, reviewed and cleared with notification change code CL26 is shown as follows.
	
		
			   Number 
			 2003-04 36,652 
			 2004-05 29,928 
			 2005-06 31,147 
			 2006-07 39,017

Council Tax

Eric Pickles: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer pursuant to the Answer of 20 May 2008,  Official Report, column 206W, on council tax, what proportion of the changes were made following  (a) discovery of an error by the Agency and  (b) representations from householders.

Jane Kennedy: Approximately 57 per cent. of the alterations were made following banding alterations to nearby dwellings and approximately 43 per cent. were made following representations being made by householders.

Council Tax: Valuation

Eric Pickles: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer pursuant to the Answer of 14 May 2008,  Official Report, column 1622W, on council tax: valuation, if he will place in the Library a copy of the business case prepared for the council tax banding support tool.

Jane Kennedy: A copy of the business case cannot be placed in the Library as it contains commercially confidential information in connection with third party contractors and is subject to the development of ongoing operational policy.

Council Tax: Valuation

Eric Pickles: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer pursuant to the answer of 7 July 2008,  Official Report, column 1349W, on Council Tax: Valuation, whether the Automated Valuation Model is used by the Valuation Office Agency in England to value properties, in addition to the Council Tax Banding Support Tool.

Jane Kennedy: In addition to the use of the banding support tool to support current council tax list maintenance, the Valuation office Agency is using automated valuation technology to provide value estimates to assist with other valuation activities.

Departmental Conferences

Mark Hoban: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer what the  (a) scheduled date and  (b) title was of each conference proposed to be hosted by his Department and its agencies which was cancelled before taking place in each of the last 10 years; and what costs were incurred in respect of each.

Angela Eagle: The information requested could be provided only at disproportionate cost.

Housing: Valuation

Eric Pickles: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer pursuant to the answer of 7 July 2008,  Official Report, column 1258W, on housing: valuation, if he will place in the Library a copy of the mapping information used by the Valuation Office Agency to distinguish the boundaries of each live locality within each billing authority area.

Jane Kennedy: The Valuation Office Agency does not use mapping information to distinguish the boundaries of each live locality within each billing authority area. It uses the expertise of its Chartered Surveyors and other local staff.

Housing: Valuation

Eric Pickles: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer pursuant to the answer of 7 July 2008,  Official Report, column 1258W, on housing: valuation, if he will place in the Library a copy of the data export of the most recent numerical co-efficient value assigned to each of the live localities to reflect their value significance in the automated valuation model.

Jane Kennedy: the information concerned is commercially confidential.

Housing: Valuation

Eric Pickles: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer with reference to page 18 and page 35 of the Valuation Office Agency Annual Report and Accounts 2007-08, HC 583, how many domestic dwellings received a visit from a Valuation Office Agency representative to check information in 2007-08.

Jane Kennedy: In 2007-08 approximately 135,000 domestic dwellings (out of 23 million) were visited to check information. The majority of these visits will have been undertaken without the need to go inside a person's home.

Import Duties: Occupied Territories

Tom Levitt: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer how much in duties has been collected from companies importing produce into the UK from Israeli settlements in the occupied Palestinian territory in the latest period for which figures are available.

Jane Kennedy: Between 1 February 2005 and 31 January 2008, HM Revenue and Customs have issued demands for approximately 338,000 customs duty on products imported into the UK from Israeli settlements in the occupied Palestinian territory under the provisions of the EC-Israel Association Agreement.

Office of National Statistics: Telephone Services

Mark Prisk: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer what income his Department received from the Office of National Statistics 0845 number in  (a) 2007-08,  (b) 2006-07 and  (c) 2005-06.

Angela Eagle: The Treasury Department has not received any income from the ONS between 1 April 2005 and 31 March 2008 in respect of 0845 numbers.

Revenue and Customs: Closures

Anne McIntosh: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer if he will make a statement on the closure of the HM Revenue and Customs office in York.

Jane Kennedy: HM Revenue and Customs (HMRC) published proposals on 11 June 2008 for the cluster of offices which includes Hilary House and Swinson House in York. These proposals envisage withdrawing from Swinson House and retaining Hilary House but no decisions have been taken. As wit all HMRC's proposals, these will be subject to consultation with internal and external stakeholders, including MPs with a constituency interest, and detailed feasibility work will also be undertaken before final decisions are made. It is hoped to announce decisions on the future of all HMRC's offices by the end of the year.

Revenue and Customs: Manpower

James Duddridge: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer what the headcount of HM Revenue and Customs is; and what projections for the headcount have been made for the period till 2010.

Jane Kennedy: The headcount of HM Revenue and Customs at April 2008 = 90,296.
	Forecasted headcount for HMRC is shown in the following table:
	
		
			   Headcount 
			 Required for April 2009 86,161 
			 Required for April 2010 82,778 
			  Note: Figures given are to the nearest person.

Revenue and Customs: Pay

Philip Hammond: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer how much was paid in bonuses to staff working on tax credits at HM Revenue and Customs in 2007-08, broken down by tax credit office.

Jane Kennedy: The information is not available for all staff working on tax credits. Staff in various parts of HM Revenue and Customs, not only the Tax Credit Office, may be deployed to tax credits work or deal with tax credits in addition to other work. It is not possible to isolate those in receipt of bonus payments.

Revenue and Customs: Standards

Alistair Carmichael: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer what target HM Revenue and Customs has set for the time taken to respond to public enquiries; and what its success rate in reaching the target was in the last period for which figures are available.

Cheryl Gillan: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer how many phone calls to HM Revenue and Customs call centres went unanswered in each of the last six months for which figures are available.

Jane Kennedy: HMRC's main channels for responding to public enquiries are through their telephone helplines and their network of enquiry centres.
	In 2007-08, 94.5 per cent. of telephone callers were answered on the day they rang against a target of 95 per cent. In enquiry centres, 97 per cent. of customers were given an appointment within three days, against a target of 95 per cent. HMRC also receives enquiries via post, but it is not possible to distinguish these cases from other forms of customer correspondence, such as forms.
	The following table provides the number of unanswered telephone calls for each of the last six months, including calls that received a busy message, the engaged tone or which were abandoned. The number of unanswered calls fluctuates according to the peaks in HMRC's business. The peak in demand in January reflects the self assessment filing date and demand has been high throughout the last three months as HMRC has approached the tax credits renewal deadline date.
	Customers who do not get through on their first attempt often use the rapid redial facility on their telephone to make numerous successive calls, which increases the number of unanswered calls disproportionately. However, as the statistics above show, the vast majority of callers did get through on the same day they called.
	
		
			  Month  Call attempts  Calls offered  Busy  Engaged  Abandoned 
			 January 2008 8,848,585 6,836,338 1746,712 107,149 919,133 
			 February 2008 6,075,932 5,141,541 865,168 37,323 447,479 
			 March 2008 6,675,938 4,984,449 1,605,989 69,972 618,777 
			 April 2008 9,630,957 6,390,894 2,755,023 359,540 979,871 
			 May 2008 11,564,829 6,211,032 5,024,026 162,421 1,139,916 
			 June 2008 10,430,878 6,272,554 3,892,517 55,927 1,037,559 
			   
			 Total 53,227,119 35,836,808 15,889,435 792,332 5,142,735 
			  Notes: 1. Call attemptsthe number of calls made to the service. 2. Calls offeredthe number of calls that are received by the telephone system and put into the queue to speak to an adviser. 3. Busywhere no adviser is available to handle the call, an appropriate advisory message is played. 4. Engagedcall attempts where the caller was played an engaged tone. 5. Abandonedwhere the caller selected an option from the call steering menu and was put in a queue to speak to an adviser but the call was terminated before the caller spoke to an adviser.

Taxation

Ashok Kumar: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer 
	(1)  what average percentage of the income of the lowest earning 10 per cent. of people is taxed;
	(2)  what average percentage of the income of the highest earning 10 per cent. of people in the UK is taxed.

Jane Kennedy: Information on the distribution of income of taxpayers and the income tax they pay is published on the HM Revenue and Customs website at:
	http://www.hmrc.gov.uk/stats/income tax/menu.htm
	The share of total income before tax and income tax paid by the top and bottom deciles of taxpayers ranged on total income can be found in Table 2.4 Shares of total income (before and after tax) and income tax for percentile groups.
	The proportion of earnings paid in income tax by individuals at the top and bottom deciles of the distribution of earnings can be found in Table 2.7 Percentage of earnings paid in income tax.

Taxation: Domicil

Ashok Kumar: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer 
	(1)  what estimate he has made of the effect on UK gross domestic product if non-domiciles working in the UK were to be included in the UK income tax system;
	(2)  what estimate he has made of the amount of revenue which would be raised by including non-domiciles in the UK income tax system.

Jane Kennedy: Non-domiciles working in the UK are included in the UK income tax system. Any income or gains earned in the UK by non-domiciles is taxed via the UK Self Assessment or PAYE systems.

Valuation Office Agency: Expenditure

Eric Pickles: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer 
	(1)  with reference to page 56 of the Valuation Office Agency Annual Report and Accounts 2007-2008, HC 583, what the total value of payments made to Rightmove.co.uk plc was in 2007-08;
	(2)  with reference to page 56 of the Valuation Office Agency Annual Report and Accounts 2007-08, HC 583, if he will provide a breakdown by  (a) supplier and  (b) value the goods and services provided under the heading of Data capture.

Jane Kennedy: I refer the hon. Member to the Valuation Office Agency annual report and accounts 2007-08, HC 583.
	A copy of the contract, detailing the services provided, was placed in the Library on 26 July 2007.

Valuation Office Agency: Standards

John Battle: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer what projects in  (a) Leeds Metropolitan District and  (b) Leeds West constituency sponsored by the Valuation Office Agency were subject to gateway services in each of the last five years.

Jane Kennedy: None.

Valuation Office: Cole Layer Trumble

Eric Pickles: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer if he will place in the Library a copy of the agreement between Cole Layer Trumble/Tyler Technologies and representatives of the Valuation Office Agencys' redacting commercially confidential information.

Jane Kennedy: No such agreement exists between the Valuation Office Agency and Cole Layer Trumble/Tyler Technologies who are third party providers of Automated Valuation Modelling (AVM) software and support.

Valuation Office: Photography

Eric Pickles: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer pursuant to the Answer of 18 October 2008,  Official Report, column 1279W, on Valuation Office: manuals, if he will place in the Library a copy of  (a) the best practice guide for taking and adding photographs and  (b) the digital photography IT user manual referred to on page 28 of the Council Tax Referencing Manual.

Jane Kennedy: I refer the hon. Member to the answers given on 23 January 2008,  Official Report, column 2099W and 3 May 2006,  Official Report, column 1725.

Valuation Office: Video Recordings

Eric Pickles: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer pursuant to the Answer of 14 May 2008,  Official Report, column 1630W, on Valuation Office: video recordings, if he will place in the Library a copy of the start of year message video.

Jane Kennedy: A copy of the video has been placed in the Library.